You are on page 1of 458

User Manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 6.00

2011 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved. This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Anite Finland Ltd. Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Outlook, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. MapInfo and MapX are registered trademarks of MapInfo Corporation. CDMA 2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license management portion of this Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* 1989-2003 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision 6.00.01, Last edited July 2011

CO NTE NTS

CONTENTS
QUICK GUIDE
SETTING UP THE SYSTEM DATA MEASUREMENTS USING NEMO OUTDOOR Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options

9
9 10 11 12

BEFORE YOU BEGIN


COPY PROTECTION Technical Support Expiration IMPORTANT End-User License Agreement Traffic Safety Operating Environment

13
13 16 17 18 19 19

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 20


VOICE TESTING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE NEMO INVEX INDOOR MEASUREMENTS 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM27


HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Connecting a GPS Receiver Connecting a Scanner Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Connecting Voice Quality Devices NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING 27 28 29 29 29 30 31 32 33 38

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

39

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR 39 Configuration through Welcome page 39 Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog 42 Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually 44 Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES 47

46

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

CONFIGURATION MANAGER Handler Information User Interface Notifications Scripts Base Station Files Device Configurations Devices View Groups

48 49 50 58 62 63 64 65 70

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES 71 Measurement Properties General 71 Measurement Properties Measurement Settings 73 Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Mobiles Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 77 Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Scanners Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Scanners 86 Measurement Properties Spectrum Scanning 98 Measurement Properties - Script 101

74 79

DURING MEASUREMENTS
MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner With a Mobile MAKING VOICE CALLS Voice Call Properties Voice Call Properties TETRA VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS MAKING VIDEO CALLS DATA TRANSFERS Configuring the Data Connection Configuring the FTP Protocol Configuring the SFTP Protocol Configuring the HTTP Protocol Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol Configuring the POP3 Protocol Configuring the SMTP Protocol Configuring the WAP Protocol Configuring the Streaming Protocol Configuring the Trace Route Protocol Making Data Transfers STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING VOIP CALLS SMS TESTING SMS Testing with CDMA terminals MMS TESTING Packet Session Settings for MMS MMS Editor

102
103 103 103 103 104 106 107 109 112 112 117 120 122 124 125 127 130 132 133 135 135 136 138 139 139 140 141

CO NTE NTS

Making MMS Measurements MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 START EXTERNAL APPLICATION ICMP PING IP PACKET CAPTURING MAKING SCRIPT FILES Script Transfer Stop Commands Add Menu Wait Settings Advanced Running Scripts MEASUREMENT LISTS FORCING FUNCTIONS Channel Locking Band Locking Handover Control Cell Barring CELL TESTING

142 142 145 148 149 151 156 158 161 162 164 168 169 171 171 173 174 179 180

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION 181 Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile 182 Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 184 PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS 185 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone 186 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 188 CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 188 CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners 189 GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS BAND SCAN TIMESLOT TESTING VIEWING GRAPHS Graph Popup Menu Zoom - Scatter Graph Graph Side Panel - Layers Graph Side Panel Values & Parameter Graph Layer Color Configuration 189 192 194 196 197 200 202 210 212 219

VIEWING GRIDS 218 Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message Grid Popup Menu 219 VIEWING MAPS Map Side Panel Route Plans Map Popup Menu Color Set Editor Map Example 1 Map Example 2 246 248 250 255 273 275 276

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Map Example 3 Map Example 4 Map Example 5 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Multiple Routes and Floorplans Indoor Route Planning Indoor Map Popup Menu

277 278 279 281 282 283 285

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT REPORT

293
294

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Selecting Playback Files During Playback Viewing and Moving Markers Closing Playback Files

296
296 296 296 297 298 299

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER299

USER INTERFACE
VIEW GROUPS MENU BAR TOOLBAR STATUS BAR NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Measurement Menu Playback Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS Custom Windows Parameter Tree Search Functionality Devices View Device Status View Output Window Script Status Window Controlling Windows

302
302 303 303 303 304 304 305 305 306 308 308 310 310 311 315 315 316 317 319 321 321 321 322

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW

TROUBLESHOOTING
LOW THROUGHPUT All Windows Versions

324
324 325

CO NTE NTS

Windows XP Windows Vista/Windows7 DEVICE STATUS VIEW CANNOT ADD DEVICES CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

326 326 328 328 329 329 329

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS


TOOLBAR BUTTONS DIALOG BUTTONS GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

330
330 331 332 333

SHORTCUT KEYS NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT


INTERNET SUPPORT USER CLUB PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT

336 337 340


340 340 340

APPENDIX 1
INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD

342
342

APPENDIX 2 APPENDIX 3
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo SW

343 345
345 345

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET344

APPENDIX 4 APPENDIX 5
NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Common Components Optional components MMAC3 WITH CASE Lid Carrying case MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION Without Carrying Case With Carrying Case

347 351
351 352 352 356 357 357 359 360 364 364 366

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR347

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

APPENDIX 6
NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Setting Up the System Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi

372
372 372 375 379 385

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE 386


VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line Mobile-to-Mobile 389 389 390 390

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ) Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing 390 Disassembling the EVOQ Module 411 Assembling the EVOQ Module 412 NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY TERRATEC SOUND CARD 412 Nemo Voice Quality TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data 412 Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP 413 Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card

420 431

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 430 NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications 431 Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver 433

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 436 MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 438 438 444

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES 450


PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings Antivirus Filtering Low Data Throughputs 450 450 450 450

APPENDIX 10
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

455
455

Q UI CK G UI DE

QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM


From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onwards the software is protected with a copy protection module and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based copy protection licenses are no longer valid. 1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (p.27). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor 5.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CDROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup. 2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the copy protection module on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (p.13). Please insert the copy protection module and wait until Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue the setup. 3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer. 4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computers COM and/or USB ports. If you are using a laptop, you will probably need a PCMCIA card or a USB serial converter to create additional COM ports. Install the PCMCIA card or USB serial converter and the required driver (p.342). Connect the devices to the COM ports with the specified cables and switch the devices on. Especially with GPRS mobiles that have two cables, be sure to use the correct cable. 5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Choose one of the following steps: Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually. 6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them. 7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see p.42).

10

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

8. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the work offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. 9. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices, which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection. 10. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) (p.48) to add measurement devices manually. Select the Device item and click the Add button . Select the device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Properties dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK. 11. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows Explorer to copy all the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps. Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog, double-click the User Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field, browse the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (p.55). 12. If you have base station files (.nbf), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in the BTS File field. Click OK. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.

DATA MEASUREMENTS
A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.

Setting up data measurements:


1. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.66). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Dial-Up Connection. 2. Open the Measurement Properties, Measurement settings dialog (p.73). For circuit-switched data measurements, double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item to define Data Call Properties (p.128). For packet-switched data calls, double-click the Packet Session item to define Packet Session Settings (p.114).

Q UI CK G UI DE

11

3. Select a data protocol in the Selected Data Protocol field. Then define properties for the selected data protocol by double-clicking the respective item under Supported Data Protocols: Browsing (p.125), FTP (p.118), HTTP (p.123), ICMP Ping (p.149), POP3 (p.126), SFTP (p. 121), SMTP (p.128), TCP/UDP (Iperf) (p. 115), Trace Route (p.134), WAP (p.131), or Streaming (p.133). 4. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p.149). 5. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (p.138). 6. To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p.139). 7. Click OK. You can now start data measurements.

USING NEMO OUTDOOR


When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and is ready for measurements. 1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement. Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.). 2. You can use Scripts (p.135) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. Click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button. 3. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the Notifications function (p. 58). Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog. 4. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Nemo Outdoor will start the recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the recording and the script, click the Stop button . 5. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call or send MMS message, from the Measurement control menu. 6. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computers hard disk. You can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click the Rename button to change the file name. 7. Click the Start Playback button to playback a file. During playback use the Pause button to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in time. You can also open and close windows during the playback (p.296).

12

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options


Outdoor supports the following command-line options. These command lines will enable the user to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcuts Properties | Shortcut |Target field. /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor /H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to save any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace.

Hence, the following command line Outdoor5 /W test.wor /H N95.hwc /M SIMPLE

will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.wor workspace, N95.hwc hardware configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.

BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N

13

BEFORE YOU BEGIN


This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool Software for Windows XP Professional and Windows 7 developed by Anite Finland Ltd. Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital networks. The supported network standards are: cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz CDMA2000 1xEV-DO AMPS DVB-H EGPRS GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz GPRS HSDPA HSUPA HSPA+ LTE TD-SCDMA TETRA iDEN UMTS (FDD mode) WiMAX Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze for Windows. Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.

COPY PROTECTION
From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onward, only hardware-based copy protection is used. A USB copy protection dongle will be delivered in the Nemo Outdoor package. Plug in the copy protection dongle in a USB port on your PC. Note that the new dongle introduced in Nemo Outdoor 5.80 will not be backwards compatible with the older versions of Nemo Outdoor. A new dongle with a valid technical support and maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions. If you have problems starting Nemo Outdoor, and if the following error messages appear, please contact Nemo Technical Support at Nemo.Helpdesk@anite.com.

14

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

No Valid License Detected


If the error message Error: No valid license detected. appears when the application is started, either the dongle key is not plugged in or the dongle key is an unsupported model.

Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old dongle key, it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5.4. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. The example above is seen, e.g. when the SPS 00868 dongle key is in use.

No Valid Technical Support Agreement


If the error message below appears, it means that the dongle key type is correct, but that the dongle key is missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information.

Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key with the Remote Update Utility. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the dongle key without information about the technical support agreement, it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5.80. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version.

The old dongle key

The new dongle key

The dongles are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Before updating Nemo Outdoor application please make sure that new dongle key is available. Note that you must use the latest version of the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5.80, or it can alternatively be downloaded from Nemo User Club. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor dongle.

BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N

15

Updating the dongle (Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 and later)


1. Start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo Tools | Remote Update Utility. 2. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.

3. Connect your copy protection module 4. Click Collect Information and select a location where the C2V file is saved. 5. Send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at nemo.helpdesk@anite.com. Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject Nemo Outdoor dongle update: Company name First name Surname Street address Zip/ Postal Code Country Telephone number Mobile number

6. After you have received the V2C file containing the update, select the Update File in the Apply License Update tab and click Apply Update.

16

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. The dongle is now updated. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use.

Technical Support Expiration


The new dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical support and maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 with a 1-year technical support maintenance agreement in April 2011. The customer is entitled for free updates until April 2012. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the dongle key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed, the dongle key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version.

BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N

17

IMPORTANT
Please note that when you are Running Nemo Outdoor on Windows 7, you need to start Nemo Outdoor by right-clicking the icon and selecting Run as administrator. Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to Control Panel | Power Options. Select the High performance power plan.

Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.

18

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind wireless technologies. Especially note at this time that Anite Finland does not recommend using Toshiba laptop computers with Nemo Outdoor. This is due to certain incompatibilities that may cause the USB port not working as desired. The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200, TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been verified by Anite Finland. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description or the compatibility list in the user manual for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite Finland. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor system is running. With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a wrong number. With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated. In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386. Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of the mobile. After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor triggered events in the mobile. Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computers serial port. When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.

End-User License Agreement


The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. For full details of this agreement, see Appendix 8 on page 450.

BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N

19

Traffic Safety
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety comes first. Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Finland assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.

Operating Environment
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the devices used by Nemo Outdoor. Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic devices. Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or sites where blasting operations are in progress.

20

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW


VOICE TESTING
The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided or, optionally, provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed) with the Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista operating system. The package also includes the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.

NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW

21

CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING


The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a dial-up server. The dial-up server is used to establish a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-switched data.

The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only receive files. The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

22

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING


The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linuxbased administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route testing, and RTSP (video streaming). PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.

The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only receive files. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW

23

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI


The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM, EDGE, WCDMA, HSDPA, CDMA2000, and WiMAX, and different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices, i.e. up to five test mobiles, scanners, and a GPS device. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system. Combined with Nemo Server, Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to carry out, not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance of different technologies or operators, but also long-term network performance measurements. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a cars +12VDC power output. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use, preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop.

24

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE


The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW

25

NEMO INVEX

Nemo Invex system combines powerful intuitive software and scalable military grade hardware design to create superior drive-test systems for wireless networks. Quick and easy to deploy, Nemo Invex provides critical quality-of-service (QoS) measurements and a wide variety of quality-ofexperience (QoE) service testing, including the latest voice and video quality measurement algorithms. Nemo Invex is flexible and scalable, capable of evolving as the network evolves providing the lowest effective total cost of ownership available. The Nemo Outdoor software application that runs on the Nemo Invex 4G chassis for benchmarking is also widely known as a tool for network optimization. With other benchmarking tools QoS statistics can be collected but no actual reasons for possible issues, such as, low data rates can be seen without a cause identified. Often the network issue is interference and other benchmarking tools are collecting quality parameters but no real time analysis is performed. The Nemo solutions allow the user to activate different interference analysis measurements, such as, WCDMA pilot pollution, GSM cochannel/ adjacent channel interference and GSM/ WCDMA missing neighbor detection. These enhanced capabilities help to save time and money and provide additional value added information also to benchmarking campaigns. Furthermore, significant cost savings can be realized by bundling the data collection solution with a post-processing solution as Anite has a comprehensive postprocessing solution, Nemo Analyze.

26

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

INDOOR MEASUREMENTS
Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively normal laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. You can use floorplans as maps.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

27

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM


This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your computer.

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS


PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows XP (32- bit) Professional or Windows 7 Professional (32-/64-bit). Pentium III processor, minimum 1GHz, preferably 1.7 GHz for single mobile measurements For multi data measurements Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel Quad Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required 512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel Quad Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required 100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 1 GB recommended One USB port for copy protection module One USB port per mobile Depending on the scanner used, one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card One USB port for an external GPS receiver Display resolution 1024 x 768 with 256 colors, 1280 x 1024 recommended Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for viewing the help file

If your computer does not have enough serial ports, the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information.

28

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS


The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette lighter plug). External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported) Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Garmin V Garmin 18 USB Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

DKU-2 USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles: Nokia 6230i Nokia 6630 Nokia 6680

DKU-2 or CA-53 cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles: Nokia N80 Nokia 6136 Nokia N92

DKE-2 or mini USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles: Nokia 7376

Datang DTM8101 or DTM8120 mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.370.010 data cable and a free USB port Leadcore LC8310E mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.370.010 data cable and a free USB port Nokia N75 mobile with the DKE-2 or the DKU-2 connectivity cable and a free USB port Nokia N95, N95 US, 6120, 6121, or 3500 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Nokia C5, C5-03, C7-00, 6720, 6720US, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97 and N97US mobile with the micro USB cable and a free USB port Motorola V3X, V9 or V9US mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

29

Huawei C7600 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung SGH-Z105, Z107, Z140, Z500, ZV10, or P920mobile with the PCB157ULE USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z560 or ZX20 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z720, or A707 mobile with the PCB200BBE USB cable and a free USB port Qualcomm CDMA2000 Compatible, MSM6500 Compatible, MSM6800 Compatible, TM6200, TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US or TM7200 mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port LG U800 or KU950 mobile with a mini USB cable and a free USB port LG KX260, C270, C680, C676, and LHD-200E mobile with a LG VX6100/VX7000, KQ-U8A cable and a free USB port

Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software is protected with a copy protection dongle. See page 13 for more information about copy protection.

NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION


To install the Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software:
1. Start Windows and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e.g., drive D). Note that for Windows XP and Windows Vista, installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with administrative privileges. 2. Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor 5\Nemo Outdoor x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. 3. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the computer.

NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP


Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. However, instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide.

Connecting a GPS Receiver


To connect the serial GPS receiver:
1. Plug the GPS data cable into a free serial port on your computer. 2. Plug the other end of the cable into the GPS receiver, if applicable. 3. Connect the cable of the GPS antenna unit to the GPS receiver, if applicable. 4. Connect the power cable to the GPS receiver (see the GPS receiver manual), if applicable. 5. Switch on the GPS receiver. 6. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button .

30

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. 8. Select the serial port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table:
Navigator Type Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Trimble Placer GPS 450/455 Baud rate 4800 4800 4800 4800 9600 Data bits 8 8 8 8 8 Parity None None None None None Stop bits 1 1 1 1 1

9. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. If your computer does not have enough serial ports, the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information.

To connect the USB GPS receiver:


1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer. 2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers. 3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button . 4. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. 5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table:
Navigator Type Garmin 18 USB Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1

6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

Connecting a Scanner
See the Nemo Scanner Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor. If an external fast frequency scanner for a computers serial port is used, follow these instructions in order to connect the scanner to Nemo Outdoor. For a list of necessary hardware, refer to page 28.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

31

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device


Below you will see the two different options as of Nemo Outdoor Multi system that. See page 351 for further information on how to set up the system. The graph below depicts the system when it is purchased without the carrying case.

32

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The graph below displays the system as when purchased with the carrying case.

Connecting Voice Quality Devices


Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide on page 372 for complete installation and configuration instructions.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

33

NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP


After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Click the Measurement servers button in the Devices view. A list of available measurement servers is displayed. Select Add | Autodetect Measurement Servers to find all measurement servers connected to the system. If a measurement server is missing from the list, click the Add button and select Add Measurement Server Name. Enter the server name (IP address) and click OK. Nemo Outdoor will try to connect to the server.

To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change to Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor. Finally, click Close.

34

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices connected to the measurement servers.

A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. In the Mode column, define whether the device will be used for voice or voice and data measurements. Please note that one measurement server supports only one data-enabled device at a time. In other words, if you have two data-enabled devices connected to the same measurement server, you must use one of them in Voice mode.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

35

If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration supported by the scanner.

Finally click Add Devices. The devices will be added to Nemo Outdoor. Depending on the number of devices, this may take a few minutes. Click the Group devices by type/server button by server. to group the devices by type (phone or scanner) or

36

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Device Status view displays all the connected devices and their status. By resizing the view, you can change how the devices are organized.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM

37

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view.

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.

It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

38

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a measurement server and click Disconnect.

GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING


Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no slashes or cuts. Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength. Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

=c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz, = 66 cm 900 MHz, = 33 cm 1800 MHz, = 17 cm 1900 MHz, = 16 cm GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz, = 19 cm

Check the configuration before starting the measurement. Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance. When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

39

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in this initial configuration.

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR


You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.

Configuration through Welcome page


1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2. With the Automatic device detection functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information, and matches a dialup connection with the assigned modem port for the device. Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu.

40

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may need to create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. The COM ports are created with the dial-up connection. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings. 3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below, start them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button, or refresh the device configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again. 4. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

41

5. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. This includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

6. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices manually and activate them. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. 7. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.

42

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog


To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window. 1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.

2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

43

3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. 4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.

5. Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or remove devices button in the Devices view. Choose the appropriate phone, scanner, or GPS receiver from the list and click Next. 6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly. For example, if device supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated. Before trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device. If license do not cover e.g. MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices), device is added to Nemo Outdoor application with an other chipset support e.g. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not activated. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported: Qualcomm TM6200 Qualcomm TM6250 Qualcomm TM6275 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6275 US - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6280 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM7200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices Qualcomm TM8200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices

44

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Qualcomm TM8220 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices Qualcomm MDM9200 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices Qualcomm MDM9600 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices

7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values. 8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Phone/Scanner Properties dialog to enter the Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. 9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (alt+M) to open the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the measurements.

Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually


If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the toolbar.

A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connection appears. Select the devices you want to add, and click the Add Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices dialog. Select Add Devices in Specific Order to select the order of the added devices.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

45

In the Add Devices dialog you can select a device and move it up or down in the list to define the device order with the arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog.

Click Add Devices to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor.

46

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup


The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when devices are connected and started. In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations. 1. Go to View | User Interface Properties. 2. On the General page, select the Start recording automatically when devices are started option.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

47

3. On the Measurement page select Yes in the Start scripts automatically field.

4. Click OK. 5. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As, and File | Save Device Configuration As. 6. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.

CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES


The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. However, the PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data testing purposes, see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland. Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out measurements. Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below: Nokia 6230i

48

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

CONFIGURATION MANAGER
Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar button . The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. All these items, except System Properties and Handler Information, can be configured. Select an item from the list and click the Properties button .

The default System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor. Double-clicking on the Measurement Properties item leads to the User Interface Properties | Measurement view on page 52.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

49

Handler Information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must have the corresponding handler installed.

50

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items: User Interface Properties, Custom Windows, Notifications, Scripts, Color Palettes, Color Sets, and Presentation Modes. The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see page 57). Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information on how to create color sets, see page 273. You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see page 56). Double-click on the User Interface Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

51

User Interface Properties General

Buffer Size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement. Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the next time you start the SW. Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode to online mode. Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls after the measurement is ended. Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message when the measurement has been paused. Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing. Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements. Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in audio quality measurements also during playback.

52

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed. With the Show Stop Recording Query dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording. Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button. When the Show Enable Missing Neighbor Query dialog when recording is started option is selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled. With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file wil be generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Please note that you need to run Nemo Outdoor as Administrator.

User Interface Properties Measurement


By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all measurements.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

53

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. %a %A %b %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 366) Month as decimal number (01 12) Minute as decimal number (00 59) Sequence number (1 ) Sequence number (1 ) Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 59) Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53) Year without century, as decimal number (00 99) Year with century, as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script file when you click the Start Recording button in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off. Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop recording after the script is finished.

54

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before repeating the scripts. With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time. Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring only after there is a GPS fix. Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed. Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from the device when the device is started. When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call. With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data testing, it can cause problems when several dial-up connections are opened from one host computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all dial-up connections are routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

55

User Interface Properties Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the default values. To change the default paths, click on the button and browse for a new location. In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see page 273. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds. Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

56

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface Properties Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

57

User Interface Properties Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes. To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

58

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default. By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

59

Notification Configuration
To make your own notifications, select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window and double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. Alternatively select View | Notification Manager. The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface Properties Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use (see page 55). Use the Play button to listen to the file. If you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female. Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\ Nemo Shared Files \Images.

60

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification. Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain events only once. Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Condition and Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification. The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to open the dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

61

To activate a notification for a particular device, click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Select the notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. The Notification Properties button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings (see page 59 for more information). By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons, you can select and clear all items in the list.

To make user-configurable notifications:


1. Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add. 2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK. 3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table. 4. Click OK to save the settings.

62

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. Creating Script files is described in more detail on page 156.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

63

Base Station Files

Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files. Select a BTS file to view the BTS information in the Configuration Manager view. Click the button to remove the BTS file.

64

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Device Configurations

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor. You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device Configurations folder. To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

65

Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting the device and clicking on the minus icon . Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own properties dialog. Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device properties dialog. These dialogs are presented next.

66

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Phone Properties

The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header. Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Dial-up Networking Setup Guide for more detailed information. Circuit switched dial-up connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a dial-up connection here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. Packet switched dial-op connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a dial-up connection here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

67

Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna type 1140.27 Frequency range 824 894/1710 1880/ 18502170 MHz 1140.26 890 960/1850 1990/ 17102170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0.55/ 0.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. or Smarteq. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu. Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu. Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements. After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu bar.

68

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Scanner Properties

In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header. Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna type 1140.27 Frequency range 824 894/1710 1880/ 18502170 MHz 1140.26 890 960/1850 1990/ 17102170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0.55/ 0.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. or Smarteq. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see page 70).

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

69

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

GPS Properties

In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header. Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600. Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver documentation. After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

70

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

View Groups

Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus icon , and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . When you select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name. See page 302 for more information on using the view groups.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

71

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES
The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by the device.

Measurement Properties General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring. BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the button to browse for a BTS file (.nbf).

72

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

By clicking the Advanced button, you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. Here you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the measurement device used. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device.

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. Please note that when measuring with a LX GSM/WCDMA scanner in a WCDMA network, the internal GPS receiver should be activated.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

73

Measurement Properties Measurement Settings


You are able to make measurement type specific configurations by clicking the corresponding field in the dialog. The Measurement Settings page of the Measurement Properties dialog is available for mobiles only.

Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog. See page 104 for more information. Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog. See page 138 for more information on SMS testing. Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See page 139 for more information on MMS testing. Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog. See page113 for more information. DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice call. Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See page 109 for more information. Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog. See page 114 for more in formation. Selected Data Protocol defines which data protocol is used to perform data transfers. Clicking the Supported Data Protocols field opens a list of supported data protocols. Clicking the field of a selected data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol. Enable VoIP Measurements option, when selected, opens the SIP server and VoIP call dialogs. See page 136 for more information.

74

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Mobiles


Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900 and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid view.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

75

If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button to define the channels to be scanned.

Select one band from the list or all of them. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from current band. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. To remove channels from the Selected list, click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove all channels, click the Remove All button. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove.

76

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the table.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

77

Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Mobiles


Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports pilot scanning.

The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile. Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH RSCP above the set value. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid view. Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.

78

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from current band. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. Click OK to exit the dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

79

Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Scanners


The Frequency scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. The contents of the sub-pages are technology-specific.

Frequency Scanning with GSM Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30 kHz narrow. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.

80

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. Cell information decoding. Mobile Network Code, Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. When the System information decoding option is selected, L3 messages are written in the log file. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access a dialog where you select the channels that will be scanned.

First select the Band. Click on a channel in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

81

To remove channels from the Selected list, click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove all channels, click the Remove All button. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the C TRL key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Frequency Scanning with UMTS Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

82

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Frequency Scanning with LTE Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

83

Frequency Scanning with CDMA/EV-DO Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

84

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Frequency Scanning with WiMAX Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Frequencies button, you can access the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80).

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

85

Frequency Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

86

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Scanners


The Pilot scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. The contents of the sub-pages are technologyspecific.

Pilot Scanning with UMTS Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No. If the values are below the threshold, the pilots are not reported. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold, value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

87

Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. In high speed mode, weak pilots may be undetected. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher.

Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement. Selective level determines a valid path. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor (average value). Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid view. When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected, the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the log file for both GSM and WCDMA. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. When the System information decoding option is selected, L3 messages are written in the log file.

88

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. If you press the arrow, a drop-down menu will appear from where you can select Top-N Search Configuration.

Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners only. In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and consequently speed up the search.

Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63. Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7. Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Channelization code specifies the channelization code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Search method defines how the search is performed. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel) searches with P-CPICH. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

89

Pilot Scanning with LTE Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. With Autodetect selected, the scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold, value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Please note that this option is not available with PCTEL EX LTE scanners. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. The available options are 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged, with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged, with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged, and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size, but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best cells. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to notify you of. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID.

90

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel, i.e., primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set. Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. When you select LTE channels, you can also define some channel-specific settings. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog, select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. Note that the available options are device specific.

Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure. Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Each radio frame of length Tf 307200 Ts 10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts 5 ms each. Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720 Ts 1 ms . The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where, for each subframe in a radio frame, D denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions, U denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and S denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS, GP and UpPTS.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

91

One radio frame , T f = 307200 T s = 10 ms One half -frame, 153600 Ts = 5 ms

One slot,

T slot=15360 Ts
Subframe #0 One subframe , 30720 Ts DwPTS

30720T s

Subframe #2

Subframe #3

Subframe #4

Subframe #5

Subframe #7

Subframe #8

Subframe #9

GP

UpPT S

D wPTS

GP

UpPT S

Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity):


Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D

Pilot Scanning with EV-DO Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

92

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold, value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). For Pilot window search mode the options are Standard, Wide and Very Wide. The Wide and Very Wide options can be used to detect pilots far away from the base stations. The sensitivity will not be affected but the scanning speed will be slower as the search window is increased. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. The available options are 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged, with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged, with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged, and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size, but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. If the values are below the threshold, the pilots are not scanned. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. It is reported in chips. Overhead message decoding, when selected, enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

93

Pilot Scanning with CDMA Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Chip window size defines the length of pilot window in chips from 1 to 64. This value is used to establish the number of chips to be searched for pilot across (Pilot Window Length) and to define the position of these chips Pilot Window Mode in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). Correlator affects how the scanner works. Bigger correlator size enables the scanner to detect and measure Pilot channels with better dynamic but makes scanning speed slower. For example, when using correlator size 2048 versus 512, the dynamic range for pilot measurement changes from 21db to 17db. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold, value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. If the values are below the threshold, the pilots are not scanned.

94

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best pilots. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. It is reported in chips. Overhead message decoding, when selected, enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific.

Pilot Scanning with WiMAX Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best preambles. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

95

CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value, in dB *100 (e.g., -16.34). It is based on the requested reuse factor. Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. The values range from 0 to 1023+32. Each sample corresponds to 89.285 nanoseconds. Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired balance between the interference and the network coverage. The WiMAX air interface modulating waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0, 1 and 2). The allocation of frequency sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e.g. a downlink signal on segment 0 will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement, contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters, so that the CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected, only the contribution of the desired segment is considered, and the CINRs are calculated only from the same segment. As a broad guideline, measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other, whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific.

96

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Pilot Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. The available options are 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged, with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged, with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged, and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size, but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results from N best pilots. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

97

The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific.

Pilot Scanning with DVB-H Scanners


Note that the available options are device specific.

Frequency defines the frequency scanned.

98

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Measurement Properties Spectrum Scanning


In the Spectrum scanning page you can define frequencies that will be scanned.

Use preamplifier option should be selected if the signal level is less than -50 dB. This will increase the scanner sensitivity, hence slightly decreasing background noise. However, it is recommended that it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click Add.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

99

Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. If you manually define the start and stop frequencies, you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as a predefined set. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the center frequency and the bandwidth. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth, you can either select to add them to the scanning list, or save them as a predefined set. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. Sample count determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range. You can define Predefined scanning sets which you can use to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned. Just double-click a set from the list and the predefined values will be selected. To create new scanning sets, define the scanning frequencies at the top of the dialog, press the Add to Scanning List button and select Save as Predefined Set.

100

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Define a name for the set in the Enter Frequency Set Name dialog and click OK.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

101

Measurement Properties - Script


In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Settings button Devices window and select Script Properties. in the

In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see page 135). With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By default the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see page 52). When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized. Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.

102

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

DURING MEASUREMENTS
When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process in a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. In the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see page 324.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

103

MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS


With a Scanner
In order to measure with a scanner, just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file. button.

With a Mobile
To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone, first make sure that the terminal model supports the scanning feature. To do frequency scanning, select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning, or Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning.

To end a scanning measurement, select Measurement control | Stop Scanning.

MAKING VOICE CALLS


To make voice calls:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Measurement settings page (p. 73), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Call field. Click OK. 2. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. 3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the Device Commands menu . If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.

104

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Voice Call Properties


Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

105

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved. Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See page 156 for more information on making scripts. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

106

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Voice Call Properties TETRA


Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile. Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Click the Voice Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and PSTN. Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen, and by pressing the PTT button, also speak Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

107

PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See page 135 for more information on making scripts. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS


Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements in GSM, WCDMA, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386 for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements. For a list of supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice and video calls as perceived by end-users. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendation P.862.1 and P. 862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. The Nemo Voice Quality system setup consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-6 mobiles and audio modules (with EVOQ) or 1-4 mobiles and audio modules (with TerraTec), and the Nemo multi rack.

In mobile-to-mobile measurements, one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample in both directions. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

108

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements, a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end, the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end, and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

109

MAKING VIDEO CALLS


Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog to access the Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made. When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

110

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved. Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See page 135 for more information on making scripts. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | General, and press the Advanced button. In the Advanced Properties dialog, you need to select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

111

Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. Method 1 - Samsung Z105 Method 2 - Samsung Z107 Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung ZX20 Method 4 - Samsung ZV10 Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700 Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad) Method 9 - Samsung G800

To make video calls and video quality calls:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK. 2. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

112

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that video quality parameters are supported only with certain Motorola test terminals. 3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.

Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call capable terminal based on Qualcomm chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement Properties | General | Advanced Properties prior to making the call. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. It is possible that if the device is not included in the list of supported terminals, the video call functionality does not work.

DATA TRANSFERS
With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have several data protocol options for making data transfers: you can use the Iperf for TCP/UDP, FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTP Browsing, POP3, SMTP, WAP, or streaming. The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer needs to be set up and configured individually. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function (Measurement settings button General Properties, Advanced button) prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

Configuring the Data Connection


Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers. If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties on page 113. If you are making PS data transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings on page 114.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

113

Data Call Properties


Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view. There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server. Username refers to the dial-up server username. Password refers to the dial-up server password. Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call. Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used. Modem type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using. The alternatives are Analog (v.34) and ISDN (v.110 and v.120). Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction. Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface. Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding.

114

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Packet Session Settings


Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

115

TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)


Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service is slightly modified for optimal performance. Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP (IPerf) items in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. Note that Firewall should be turned off. Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is 5001. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is 6015. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.

116

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):
Max. throughput 64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 384kbps (Rel. 99) HSDPA 1.8Mbps UE category 3 & 4 HSDPA 3.6Mbps UE category 5 & 6 HSDPA 7.3Mbps UE category 7 & 8 HSDPA 10.2Mbps UE category 9 HSDPA 14.4Mbps UE category 9 ~RTT (ms) 600 600 600 200 100 TCP window size (kbit) 38.4 76.8 153.6 76.8 180 TCP window size (kB) 4.8 9.6 19.2 9.6 22.5

100

360

45

100

730

91.25

100

1020

127.5

100

1440

180

TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes. UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes. UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example, if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s, there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

117

UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1,460 bytes. Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers. Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds. Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field. Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. It is not limited by time. Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties button.

Configuring the FTP Protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 118). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151).

118

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

FTP Transfer Properties


Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Port refers to the port used by the FTP server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

119

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP session. Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer sessions are started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from the beginning. Multi-threaded FTP transfer mode is supported in receive direction. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab (see page 55). Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

120

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Configuring the SFTP Protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using SFTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 121). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

121

SFTP Transfer Properties


Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

122

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP session. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab (see page 55). Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Configuring the HTTP Protocol


The HTTP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In the HTTP testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using HTTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151).

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

123

7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

HTTP Transfer Properties


Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings. Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you can use the same URL for all of them.

124

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab (see page 55).

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail.

Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol


The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured.

To set up data measurements using HTTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data or PS data (page 114). 5. Define browser transfer -related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

125

Browser Transfer Properties


Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices view.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information. Close window after transfer closes the browser window after the data transfer. The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache and cookies information is cleared after every download. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze For MULTI browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as EACH CONNECTION MUST HAVE ITS OWN IP ADDRESS. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Configuring the POP3 Protocol


POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using POP3


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.

126

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 126). Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

E-Mail Settings POP3


Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

127

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save disk space. The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

Configuring the SMTP Protocol


POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using SMTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 128). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

128

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

E-Mail Settings SMTP


Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards. Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

129

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message. See page 129 for more information on the E-Mail Editor.

E-Mail Editor
Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor. Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages.

130

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use. Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use. Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail. Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.

Configuring the WAP Protocol


The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using WAP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog (page 131). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

131

WAP Transfer Properties


Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view.

WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements. WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same URL can be used. If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several WAP transfers. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab (see page 55).

132

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Configuring the Streaming Protocol


The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the streaming testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data transfer is measured. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific. Note that in order to make streaming measurements, you need to have RealPlayer installed on the computer. You can download a free player from the www.real.com website. Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to page 151 for more information.

To set up data measurements using streaming:


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Define Streaming properties (page 133). 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

133

Streaming Properties
Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view. Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, RealPlayer is not installed on the computer. You can download a free player from the www.real.com website. RealPlayer version 10.5 is supported.

URL defines the IP address of the video file that will be streamed. For example, rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming. Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements.

Configuring the Trace Route Protocol


By conducting Trace Route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the target server. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding. A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

134

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. See below how to define Trace Route properties. 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page 135.

Trace Route Properties


Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices view.

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals, each connection must be given its own, separate IP address! Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used! If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation. HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete. HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

135

By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo Outdoor.

Making Data Transfers


After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP), FTP, SFTP, HTTP, Browsing, POP3, SMTP, WAP, or streaming), you can start making the data transfers. Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers:


1. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button. 2. To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and dial-up connection established. Then select 3. To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP context and make the GPRS attach. 4. To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.

STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING


Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports Psytechnics PVI streaming video quality testing, and measures video quality type, jitter, packet error rate, and MOS. A video preview can also be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor. Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements, so multi measurements are not possible. In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements, you will need to install RealPlayer 10 or 11 and Apple QuickTime 7.2 player on the computer, and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133).

Making streaming video quality measurements:


1. Check that RealPlayer and Apple QuickTime 7.2 player are installed on the computer. 2. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133). 3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. 4. You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter. 5. From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

136

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

VOIP CALLS
With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions. In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will need to install a SIP server. Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information on installing the Asterisk SIP server, login to http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings and VoIP call configurations dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view.

Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi. Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060. Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the corresponding password. Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server. Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid. Automatic registration, when selected, automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created). When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy. Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

137

Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices view.

SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver. Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an incoming call. Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.

Making VoIP measurements:


1. Select the Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Devices view and define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations. 2. To start packet session, click on the Measurement control button | Start Packet Session.

3. To register SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server. 4. To start VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call. 5. To end VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call. 6. Finally, to unregister SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without unregistering)

138

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

SMS TESTING
SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567. Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings. Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing. All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages. Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000 characters.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

139

Making SMS testing measurements:


Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again. 1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are sending the test SMS message. 2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings. 3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. 4. Type in the test message and click OK. 5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS. 6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testingrelated events.

SMS Testing with CDMA terminals


Note that the SMS testing functionality may depend on your terminal's software version. See the applicable datasheet for further information. SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the terminal. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing include LG C680, LG C676, LG KX206, LG KX256, LG VX8100, LG VX8350, and LG LHD-200E. The testing goes as follows. 1. Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor. 2. Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, send an SMS to the target phone number from the phones keypad. 3. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Send SMS Message. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phones Saved messages folder.

MMS TESTING
MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message sending/receiving are recorded. In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog.

140

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

If you are using the Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing, please see page 142. Some special MMS settings are required. Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not contain a PDP activation command.

Packet Session Settings for MMS


Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default. Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.

MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific. MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific. MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

141

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated. Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement. Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

MMS Editor
Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor. Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages. Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use. Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use. Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message. Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

142

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Making MMS Measurements


Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements. You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated. If you are using the Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing, please see page 142. Some special MMS settings are required.

Making MMS measurements:


1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (p.140). 2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor (p.141). 3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (p.135). 4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu. Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS. 5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This will start the measurement. 6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testingrelated events.

MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80


You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80:


1. On the phone main window, press Messag.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

143

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

144

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

6. Select the Recept. in home net. and change it to Off.

7. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off.

8. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile on and off.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

145

MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121


You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:


1. On the phone main window, press Messaging.

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

146

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

147

6. Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

7. Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone, or by selecting Options| Change| No.

8. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.

148

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No.

10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION


This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line parameters. The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data throughput parameter. The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to minimum from the browser settings. The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select Start External Application from the menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

149

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe. If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external application is closed. Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field. Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example, C:\Temp.

ICMP PING
The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor. Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter (=-1). Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the delay will occur. The options are:

150

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent immediately after the reply. Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping measurement is repeated. Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you stop it manually. Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 1 s. New request is sent every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every 1000ms.

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 50ms. New request is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

To make ping measurements:


1. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view. 2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK. 3. Click the Start Recording button .

4. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Start Packet Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says PDP Context Activated. 5. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

151

IP PACKET CAPTURING
Note that the Microsoft Network Manager needs to be installed on your computer BEFORE installing Nemo Outdoor! If you do not select this option, it will NOT be possible to install Network Manager after Nemo Outdoor installation. With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal. A separate log file is generated for each test terminal making data transfers. In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor, you must configure a dial-up connection (see the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for more information) and install the Network Monitor driver for the dial-up connection. After setting up the dial-up connection, go to Microsoft website at <http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=f4db40af-1e08-4a21-a26bec2f4dc4190d&displaylang=en> to download the free Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM32_x86_setup.exe installation file and click on Download. 1. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.2 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation.

152

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

2. Click Next in the Welcome dialog.

3. In the End-User License Agreement dialog select I accept the terms in the License Agreement option, and click Next.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

153

4. It is recommended to select the Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended) option. Click Next to continue with installation.

5. Select Typical in the Choose Setup Type dialog that appears.

154

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

6. Click Install in the Ready to install dialog.

7. Click Finish in the Completing the Setup Wizard dialog.

8. Next, install Nemo Outdoor. 9. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties, General page. Click the Advanced button. In the Advanced Properties dialog, select the Enable IP Capture option.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

155

Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is not installed.

The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

Performing IP Packet Capturing:


Network Monitor needs to be installed prior to installing Nemo Outdoor for IP packet capturing to show in Nemo Outdoor. 1. Set up a dial-up connection (see Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions). 2. In Nemo Outdoor, enable IP capturing in the Advanced Properties dialog. 3. IP packet capturing data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal and the data can be analyzed with Ethereal.

156

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

MAKING SCRIPT FILES


Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners. The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for all Script files is .nsf. You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog. You can access this dialog by clicking the Device script settings button clicking the Script Editor button. in the Devices view and

The table in the middle shows a list of all the functions and parameters that will be executed during a measurement. You can choose any of the items in the list that opens when you click the Add button. The selected item is added to the script. See the following chapter for an explanation of the different items under the Add button. Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. Select a row from the table and click the button to change the settings for that function. Delete deletes the selected entry row. Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script. Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script. Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script. Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000. When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example, if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties Configuration dialog, that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

157

New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values. Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed. Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting the file name. Close exits the dialog. Notes about script functions: Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop Examples of conditions: o Is different: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered o Is changed: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered. The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value. For example, 1. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm triggers the IF string 2. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm nothing happens 3. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm Triggers the IF string

158

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Script Transfer Stop Commands


With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. For example, a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for its completion. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not completed during a userdefined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.

The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes. In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes first.

GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

159

The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5 seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.

In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The data transfer is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds; voice call is continued. The call duration is 60 seconds.

160

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. The data transfer and voice call are aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first.

The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, but data transfer is continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

161

Add Menu

The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. Selecting an item may open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for more detailed information on the dialogs. The Start External Application item is described in more detail on page 142. In the Script Editor, by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send DTMF sequences. You can e.g. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones. This command can only be used during voice calls.

162

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Wait Settings
To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different conditions for the wait.

With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues. With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points inside the script file. Nemo Outdoors script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user. In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called PS data.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

163

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal. With the Current time option you can define a pause between items in the script. For example, you can set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts. With the Last notification option you can define a wait period after certain event notifications. For example, you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here. With the Next notification option you can make the script wait for a certain event notification to appear. For example, you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS. The until: Current system option enables you to define that the script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down menu is in use. But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not appear.

Adding a pause in the script file:


1. First define the wait time in seconds. 2. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a certain event notification, such as, call attempt. 3. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum wait time in seconds after which the script will continue.

164

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Advanced
Conditional Blocks
By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. In the Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place. In this example the serving system must be UMTS FDD. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. Click Add to list to add the condition to the list. If you want to remove the condition from the list, select it and click Remove. Click OK. Next, add commands to the script from the Add menu, and move them to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

165

Loops
You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop, you will enter the Loop Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options: Repeat the loop x times

166

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Repeat the loop for x minutes Repeat the loop until the time is x Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met

With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Then define the condition and value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script. In the first example, the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. You can move the commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

167

The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been selected from the Field drop-down menu. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. The commands inside the loop block will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.

168

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Running Scripts
After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field. Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be different for each device. 2. Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in the User Interface Properties, General dialog (see p.51), Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button. 3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file. After the script is finished, you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button ).

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

169

MEASUREMENT LISTS
Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in idle mode. In Online mode, select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog.

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list. Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default, measurement list files (*.nmix) are saved to Configuration files folder. Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. %a %A %b Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name

170

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

%B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z

Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 366) Month as decimal number (01 12) Minute as decimal number (00 59) Sequence number (1 ) Sequence number (1 ) Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 59) Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53) Year without century, as decimal number (00 99) Year with century, as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished. Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running. Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm). Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).

Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit the selected script. Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog. Start runs the measurement list.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

171

Creating a measurement list:


1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement. 2. Select a device from the Devices list. 3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script Editor button. 4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list. 5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start. 6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed. 7. To save the measurement list, click Save.

FORCING FUNCTIONS
Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features available for each terminal.

Channel Locking
This functionality is available for GSM and UMTS mobiles only. You can lock GSM and UMTS test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In other words, the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:


Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only Serving Cell values. Note that if you are using the single mode, you must keep the test mobile connected to the power cord. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off, you must switch the mobile on manually.

172

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. The Channel Locking dialog will appear on your screen.

2. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. The button will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated.

3. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing functions | Channel locking dialog to release the channel lock.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

173

Band Locking
This functionality is available only with GSM mobiles. You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and systems. Using the Band Locking dialog, you can force the mobile to use only one band or system at a time. You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking.

Choose a band or system from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog. You will need to switch the mobile off and on to activate the band lock. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button. The band lock will be released after you switch the mobile power off and on. Always remember to switch the mobile power off and on again to activate/deactivate the band lock.

174

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Handover Control
This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals. Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell. Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button | Start Voice Call). Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button | Handover Control). Define the channel and handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the handover to. The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell. The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button will indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again. The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets, i.e. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

175

During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.

176

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve. Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

177

Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4.7dB. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen with Ec/N0 value -18.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set.

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

178

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station.

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. See Making Scripts on page 156.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

179

Cell Barring
This functionality is available for GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

With the Nemo Outdoor GSM measurement mobiles you can also access barred cells. During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end users (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells (Reverse). The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring.

180

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

CELL TESTING
The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.

Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may remain empty. Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined here will be included in the test Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value will be included in the test Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

181

Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful attempts, and the number the number of attempts.

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION


Realtime missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements are also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor detection: 1. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection, 2. a scanner, or 3. a scanner and a mobile. Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality.

182

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile


1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor. 2. In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button . Select Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and Top-N option deselected.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

183

4. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

5. Click OK and OK. 6. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already, and select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning.

7. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected missing neighbors.

184

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile


You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is not available for CDMA/EVDO. A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters, such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors. Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are measuring the same frequency and channels. From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. The field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However, note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results. Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3. RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

185

Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New, click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS


Available for UMTS, CDMA and EV-DO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events, and analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoors UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match. Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.

The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.

186

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB. Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB. RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm. RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/N0 value. Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/I0 value. Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes active and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button .

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called CELLPOLLUTION. The event includes the following information: Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/N0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

187

NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the moment.

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

188

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements


Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called CELLPOLLUTION. The event includes the following information: Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/I0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

189

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners


Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS


In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are: Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB 400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB 600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB

190

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g. missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used. In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals. During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are: RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I

These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are: RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm) RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4) Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file: Terminal serving channel number or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping Cell ID RX level sub

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

191

RX quality sub C/I if available

For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner measurements and written to terminal measurement file: Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1) Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)

Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows for GSM interference analysis. Table grid and bar graph.

192

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

BAND SCAN
With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. All specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EV-DO PN, WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown. To start a band scan, right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.

Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown. Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands. The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

193

Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a text file (.csv).

194

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

TIMESLOT TESTING
This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel. Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog will be opened.

Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. This must be a valid number. Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested. Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option, the test may continue indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

195

In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test. Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the button to enter the Select Channel dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if the user stops the testing. The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far. Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.

196

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

VIEWING GRAPHS
There are four types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor: line and scatter graphs, and vertical and horizontal bar graphs. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See page 315 for opening custom windows. To open an empty graph, select Data | [graph type] | New. It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

197

Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. After this, right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the parameter to be opened.

The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. Clear the Windows button, and all the custom windows will be hidden. Clear the Parameters button, and all parameters will be hidden. The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

Graph Popup Menu


Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the graph.

198

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

199

Graph Properties
Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button .

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph. Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales. Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full screen mode.

Autoscroll
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement progresses.

Edit Parameters
By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog. Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button . Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button

200

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Use the up to move the parameters in the editing field.

and down

arrow buttons

The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

Side Panel
Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. You can also open it by clicking the Side Panel dialog button .

Layers
Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel.

Values
Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel.

Full Screen
Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Zoom - Scatter Graph


To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse from a red dot to a green dot.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

201

202

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Graph Side Panel - Layers

The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. For example, a layer can be dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button to remove the layer. The order of the layers can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.

The layer is now removed.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

203

To create space in the graph side panel, you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of the Layers view. To reopen the view, right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view.

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.

204

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Grouping Layers
The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up, Move Group Down and Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

205

Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.

206

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and drag and drop parameters into the group.

New Layer
The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group. Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See Layer Properties on page 207 for more detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

207

Hide Layer
The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer.

Remove Layer
The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer.

Layer Properties
Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the selected layer.

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs" appearance) or one straight line Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on descending or ascending order Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 = totally transparent) Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used. See p. 212 for more information on graph layer color configuration.

208

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Window size defines the number of values to be averaged Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user, so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to No. Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is set to Yes, this is not used Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is set to Yes, this is not used Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values. Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters: Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not used so that it is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or); if the list is empty, no filtering is used TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no filtering is used TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g., only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g., below bottom three RX levels are shown. Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The data tip will display information from that point of time. Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs include also the following layer properties. Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the instantaneous values in the graph Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

209

In the following example three RACH parameters are shown in the graph, and each of them has a different point style.

Arrow Down/Up
The Arrow Down and Arrow Up icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph panel. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view with the mouse.

210

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Layer Device Selection


The Layer Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Layer Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.

Graph Side Panel Values & Parameter


The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

If a given parameter value consists of more than one value, a separate parameter window appears.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

211

In the example above, the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter and its values. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. You can also drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside, beside, above or below each other. For example, in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view.

In the example below all views are separate. By clicking the maximize icon at the upper right-hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon at the top to close the view. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values.

212

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

By right-clicking on the Values view, you can access the Edit Parameters dialog (see page 199).

Graph Layer Color Configuration


Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as different colors can be assigned e.g., to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

213

If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color automatically.

If you choose Fixed color, click to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected.

214

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and Color set fields.

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set parameter menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

215

To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See Color Set Editor on page 273 for more information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

216

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information are shown with black color.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

217

The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.

218

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

VIEWING GRIDS
Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in New Window option. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor 3.3 to be installed. An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of the readymade custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor, you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns.

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter and drag it in the grid. It will be added there. The options listed in the grid popup menu will be introduced next.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

219

Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message


You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its decoded message. Select the grid view, press Ctrl + F, and type the search string in the Search string field in the Find dialog. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the Direction field, the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.

Grid Popup Menu


Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.

220

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Save As Custom Window


Right-click on a grid table and choose Save As Custom Window from the popup menu. The dialog below is opened. You can also access this dialog from the Data menu.

You can use this dialog to save a custom window with a name. The new custom window is added under the User Interface, Custom Windows item in the Configuration Manager dialog. Right-click on the item to rename the custom window.

Save Changes
Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window; e.g., size, parameters displayed, and colors.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

Automatic Scrolling
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement progresses.

Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids


To make grids more clear, you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event ID. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu, or click on the Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is opened. Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices. In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. You can set a text color and/or a background color for the selected events. If you want to colorize the background, select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set field. Alternatively, if you want to colorize only the text in the grid, select Call Events (Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set field, as in the example below. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

221

Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string. Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add

222

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Finally, click OK in the Grid Color Configuration dialog. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color corresponds to a certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids


Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a messages decoded message. In this case, you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p.273). It is possible to color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. While you can choose to colorize only one of them, it is also possible to color-code both text and background. For example, you can have a message appear in white text and blue background color. However, in that case remember to create two new color sets for the same string, for example, Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Below you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click Add

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

223

In the Color Set Properties dialog type, for example, Decoded Text in the Name field. You can also create a short name for the new color set, or write a description for it. Select string as the color set type. Click Add In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages to be colored with the new color set.

224

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Click OK, and Close in the Color Set Editor.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or the background color. If you want to colorize only the text, select the new color set created above, Decoded Text, in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. In this example the background will be color-coded, so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field, and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

225

All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set.

226

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name


Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. You can color-code the message text or the background color, or both. Color-coding a message based on its name is done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message. However, when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. 273) | Color Set Properties | String Properties, you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in the decoded message. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message name. Further, both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK.

Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

227

Next, right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors, or select Configure Colors in the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets.

228

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids


Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. The Clear All button inactivates the default color sets. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set dropdown menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the text/values in the grid. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter, note that you need to use two different color sets for it.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

229

You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit In the Color Set Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.

230

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color Configuration dialog.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

231

Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids


Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. In the Grid Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Click OK.

The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. You can also edit the default color sets. Right-click on the grid, select Configure Colors the parameter you wish to edit, and Edit The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. Click OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.

232

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used simultaneously.

Configure Filters/Quick Filter


Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected messages will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

233

. The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all lines. You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus you options based on which the grid filtering takes place. button. A conditional row appears giving

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition, you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other Parameter item in the filter target popup menu.

234

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected.

Note also that a separate, independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents, the plus icon next to the first constituent needs to be clicked. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one another with the text and if, and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place. In the example above, a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that is less than -5. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18, the message is filtered out from the grid.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

235

The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by rightclicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu. The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.

You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event), subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). All messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the same way, you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules. When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.

Decode Message
This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by double-clicking on the message row. In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message button to move to the same message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the message decoding grid as text to clipboard. With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the contents of the decoded message in three different ways.

236

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Format as list arranges the contents of a grids measurement results in a list. The Format as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

Select a string of text in the decoded text, right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as text to the clipboard. If no text is selected in the decoded text window, all text in it will be copied. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard functionality.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

237

Decode Message in New Window


This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

Automatic Decode
The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest message in decoded form.

Save - Grid

The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into a CSV file.

MapInfo Tab-File Export


You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo Tab-File. The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters that can be exported. Select the parameters that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer title for the exported .tab file.

238

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally click OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

CSV File Export


You can export measurement data into a CSV file. In an Events grid, select Save | CSV File..

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

239

The exporting is supported for a single file, and the column separator can be a comma, semicolon, tab or space. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not supported at the moment. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export.

Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application.

Select All
Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and quick way to select all lines, for example, to be exported.

Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. To move down to the next match, press F3. To move up to the next match, press Shift+F3.

240

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view. Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused)

Add/Remove Separator
The Add/Remove Separator option is relevant only with parameters and Statistics grids. Right-click on a grid table and choose Add/Remove Separator from the popup menu. You can choose a statistic or a parameter and add an open space (a separator) above it by first clicking it and then choosing the Add Separator option from the popup menu. You can remove the separator by clicking the open space and choosing Remove Separator from the popup menu.

Full Screen
The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

241

Grid Properties
Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog is opened. Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type and on the measurement device.

You can select the events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. The available parameters are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. If you select, for example, the UMTS option, all the parameters under UMTS are selected. You can also select individual parameters. Expand the branch by double-clicking on the main item (GSM, UMTS, Voice, etc.). Select the parameters that you would like to view in the grid and click OK. In the Selected tab you can view which parameters you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons. Click the Configure Colors button to access the Grid Color Configuration dialog.

242

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Parameters
The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window or in graphs. Click the User Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.

Click the Add button to define new parameters.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded. Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example, Ordered MS power level. Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched. After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

243

The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml. User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.

244

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Exporting/Importing User Parameters


Exporting user parameters
It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. 1. To export user parameters, go to File | Export Settings in Nemo Outdoor. Save the .aex file on your PC. The exported parameters will be saved on this file.

2. Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Scroll to the User Parameters folder. The user parameters previously created are listed under the folder. Select the ones you wish to export, and click OK. You can also select other items to be exported in the dialog.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

245

3. The selected user parameters and possible other items that you selected in the Export Settings dialog are now saved in the .aex file that you saved earlier.

Importing user parameters


1. To import user parameters, select File | Import Settings in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

246

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. Click OK. The user parameters are now saved and are shown in the Nemo Outdoor parameter tree under User Parameters. If there already is a user parameter with the same name saved, the imported user parameter will replace it.

VIEWING MAPS
Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New. Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when right-clicking on the map. See page 333 for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons. Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor measurements, refer to page 281.

It is possible to view selected parameters in map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

247

If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you can define the current location manually. A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. If you select a BTS file (.nbf) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window. Note that the BTS file is displayed only if there is a measurement file loaded on the map as well. The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS. Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells. You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file (.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor. Note that each MapInfo map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file. (Only for raster images). When MapInfo raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map. When using vector data for MapInfo, there are three different files that need to be in the same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for Raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo map. If you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning the color map to black and white. While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

248

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Map Side Panel

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

249

The contents of the map side panel depend on which items have been selected in the map popup menu. Right-click on a map and select Color Legend, Layers, and Waypoints in the popup menu to view the three items above. You can drag each view to different places on the map as well, or dock it to another side of the map window following the arrows that appear when you drag the window. When you double-click on the displaced view, it will resume its original position in the side panel. You can view three different kinds of items in the Layers view. The item indicates a devicespecific measurement route on the map, the item indicates a base station file connected to the measurement route, and the item indicates a route plan. Double-click on an item to access its Properties dialog (see p.263). You can also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking on the item and selecting Properties in the popup menu. When you right-click on a layer, the following popup menu appears:

In the popup menu you can select whether or not you want to show or delete a layer. You can also clear the option next to the layer item if you do not want to view it, or click on the X button next to the option to delete the layer. Through the Properties item you can access the layers Properties dialog (see p.263), and you can also add a new route or a new BTS file from the popup menu or directly from the Layers view. The Add route functionality is useful, for example, when a multi measurement is loaded, and you want to view all the routes in the Layers view and all the color legends in the Color legends view. The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color legends will be shown next to one another in this view. See page 273 on how to create and edit color sets.

The Waypoints view is meant for controlling route plans. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See the Route Plans chapter below for more information on waypoints.

250

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Route Plans
Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement. You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as a custom window for later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views. If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Open Route Plan from the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel, and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next.

Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints


Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline mode. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see page 39) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window, or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data | Map | New.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

251

You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled.

252

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Waypoint detection radius slide bar indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint.

You can make changes to the route plan through the four buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view. To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others, and the Distance to next waypoint field will display the appropriate distance in meters to the next waypoint. In addition, the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

253

You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement


In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a measurement. Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon, or select the option from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map, the layer list should have a new layer (Untitled.rpf), and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

254

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all the circles. See page 250 for more information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement.

Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window


When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File (.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window]. You
will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window].

First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. When you open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

255

Map Popup Menu


Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

256

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Save as MapInfo Tab-file


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File


Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

257

Export to Google Earth


By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

Find Map at Position


When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders.

Create Route Plan


The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.

Open Route Plan


Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.

Save Route Plan


The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

258

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Find Cell
With Find cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number.

Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow. Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons. Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

259

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

Auto Clear Route


The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the tool.

Previous View and View Entire Map


With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route


By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.

Scale
The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated.

Modify Route
With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix was lost in a tunnel. Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu.

260

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The route will be displayed as dots.

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

261

When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Color Legend
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Layers
By selecting the Layers item you will be able to view all the layers of the map in the map side panel.

Waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and save a route plan for later use.

262

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Measure Distance
Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand panel.

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two points is used as the radius.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

263

To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To hide the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.

Side Panel
When Side Panel is selected, you will be able to view the side panel in the map window. The Color Legend, Layers and Waypoints items can only be viewed in the side panel, and if you activate any of these items, also the side panel will be shown along with the specific item. However, if you start by activating the side panel, all the three items will be shown in the side panel.

Full Screen
Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Layer Properties
The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the devicespecific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

Route Properties
When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties, the Route Properties dialog appears. You can also access this dialog by doubleclicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel.

In the case of multi measurements, you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device page. Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route. By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog (see p.272).

264

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option, the route will be drawn thicker when the device is using the 1800/1900 band. When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn during when measurement is in pause.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

265

On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring. Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set option. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. If you are measuring with a scanner, also select the channels/pilots displayed by clicking the Select Channels/Select Pilots button. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page 273 for more information on defining color sets. Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is not drawn while in GSM.

266

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map. You can also define the notification icon size in pixels.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

267

By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page, you will be able to view textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note in the Text color and Background color fields.

The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map. Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel. See page 248 for more information. Select the Show Active Cell Information option to display active base stations along with channel numbers and cell IDs. Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option, if you only want to draw a line from active system cell(s) to the test vehicle. Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid. Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the terminal. Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog.

268

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

BTS Properties
When a base station file is selected in the map side panel, the BTS Properties dialog appears when Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. You can also view the dialog by double-clicking on the BTS file in the map side panel.

BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. The BTS file is selected in the Measurement Properties - General dialog. You can also select the BTS file through this dialog. If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM), select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base stations are hidden. Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active system base stations and for other base stations. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file. Neighboring cells are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a bolded outline. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

269

Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets. Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.

See page 273 for more information on how to edit and create color sets. On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station.

270

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information and define the Text color and Background color. In the example below, all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.

The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

271

The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell range transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar.

272

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Route Plan Properties


When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel.

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel. The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.

MapX Properties
Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

273

If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the maps position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.

Color Set Editor


You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties | Color dialog. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor.., or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). With the Color Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an existing color set, double-click on the color set.

274

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.

Name and Short name identify the color set. You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field. Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, numerical, gradient, or string. The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog. Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them. Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for the value range. Finally click OK.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

275

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values.

Map Example 1
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set. In the Route Properties | Route dialog, Color page, select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter field, and Active set size in the Color Set field, and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the Active set size values.

276

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Map Example 2
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. In the Measurement's Route Properties dialog, Color page, select TX Power in the Parameter and Color Set fields and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX Power values. In this color set, green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

277

Map Example 3
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. Base station icons are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations. In the Layer view in the map side panel, click on Add BTS File, or right-click on the measurement layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again, and select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station, and Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. On the Color page, select the Use color set option, select Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field, and EcN0 in the Color set field. Click OK. The Color Legend in the side panel displays the color codes for the EcNo values.

278

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Map Example 4
In the map below, the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. The route with the blue current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set, and the route with the black current location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set. In the Layers view click the Add Route button, or right-click on the existing measurement layer and select Add Route. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page, and now there should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. Right-click on the first measurement route and select Properties. On the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field, and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. Click OK. Next, right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view, and select Properties. In the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and MS Power Level in the Parameter field, and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK. You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. In addition, you will see the measurements in the Layers view, and their color sets in the Color legends view in the map side panel.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

279

Map Example 5
It is possible to export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file. The Google Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file. Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button in the map window.

280

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

A Save As dialog appears. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field, and type a name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Click Save.

Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Note that you must have Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.

The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

281

VIEWING FLOORPLANS
Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. It is possible to view selected parameters in indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click on Move and select a new destination for the marker.

282

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the measurement and walking around in the building, use the markers to draw the measurement route on the floor plan. If you are running Nemo Outdoor on the Microsoft XP Tablet PC Edition, click with the Tablet PC pen on the screen and the marker will be placed there. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window. You can make changes to a route by selecting a layer in the Layers view and double-clicking on it to view the layer properties dialog. Alternatively, you can right-click on the map and select Properties which views the properties dialog for the active layer, or click on the Properties button in the Indoor map toolbar. In the Route Properties dialog that appears select a route in the Device drop-down menu. The Route page enables you to define route line thickness in the Thickness field. It is also possible to select a default color or parameter color set for the route in the Color page. In the Notifications page you can choose whether to view notifications on the map. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Multiple Routes and Floorplans


You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above. The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the color legends in the Color legends side panel.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

283

You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

Indoor Route Planning


Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar, and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

284

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor maps. See page 250 for more information.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

285

Indoor Map Popup Menu


Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

286

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Save as MapInfo Tab-File


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File


Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

287

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

Import Map
You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as maps. Click the Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the popup menu. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you must define some map settings. Either define the dimensions in meters of the area visible on the map or define the GPS coordinates of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the map area.

Create Route Plan


The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map window.

288

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Open Route Plan


Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

Save Route Plan


The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

View Entire Map


The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route


The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Show Minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

289

Show Marker Info


Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

Color Legend
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Show Markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

Show Layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

Full Screen
Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

Route Properties Indoor Map


In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map. Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window.

290

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is paused.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

291

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set button. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page 263 for more information on defining color sets. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the route is not drawn while in GSM. Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

292

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

293

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end the measurements:


1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. 2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed. 3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this file. 10. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor, select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window.

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were.

294

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

MEASUREMENT REPORT

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some statistics from the measurement. Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder. If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option. To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file with the default name, click Save. Note that if you press Esc on your computers keyboard, or click on the button on the dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.

E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

295

Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze. Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze 5.X installed on the same computer where Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Analyze Measurement dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze. Finally click Upload.

296

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server. The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the device number.

ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS


The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example, with: Nemo Outdoor Playback functions Nemo tool Nemo Analyze Text editor Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd.

PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES


Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.

Selecting Playback Files


When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback when you close the playback file(s). The following file types can be opened by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer: Measurements files (.nmf) Workspaces (.worx) Hardware configurations (.hwcx) Maps (.tab, .gst)

With Windows 7 it is required that Nemo Outdoor is launched with the "Run as Administrator" command.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS

297

To open files for playback, select File Open Measurement. This will open up the following dialog. See also p. 39 for more information on how to open measurement files for playback.

In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the button. The File Header box displays the measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can still clear some of the files from playback.

During Playback
The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be found in the Playback menu. The Play button starts the playback. The Pause button pauses the playback. The Stop button stops the playback. With the Add Textual Note button you can add written remarks in the measurement file. The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

298

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Viewing and Moving Markers


You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar. Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements. Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the same point of time.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS

299

Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is saved in the marker file.

Closing Playback Files


After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load the same device(s).

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER


You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server when a measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that Nemo Outdoor must be in offline mode during the transfer, as otherwise the modem ports required for the FTP transfer will be in use.

300

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Select File | Send Measurement to FTP Server. Select one or more measurements in the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog.

Click on the FTP Options button.

In the FTP Options dialog you can define the FTP Server and Proxy server settings.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS

301

Under FTP Server you can define the FTP server address in the Server address field, and the name of the folder to which the measurement files are sent on the FTP server in the Remote folder field. The Username and Password fields will grant you permission to access the server. You can also select the Use passive mode option for the transfer, and when the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination folder to another one in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up connection. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password fields will become active. After configuring the FTP settings, click OK. The Measurement file(s) are sent to the FTP server.

302

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

USER INTERFACE
This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. You will find general descriptions on all the commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in the following sections. The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows standards. If you are not familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft Windows Documentation.

VIEW GROUPS
View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as another tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps, and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

303

MENU BAR
The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog with options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots () will open a dialog. Note that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are presented on the menus next to the menu commands.

TOOLBAR

You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar. See page 330 for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.

STATUS BAR
The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window.

304

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS


The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.

File Menu

The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations. Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu. By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send measurement files to an FTP server (see p.299). With the Export and Import Settings items you can export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the .aex file: Scripts Color sets Custom views Device configurations Notification settings Route plans Workspaces

You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

305

The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files, respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.

Edit Menu

In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program. The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid (see page 239).

View Menu

In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the standard toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device status, those you wish to see on the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user. You can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification Manager, User Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing view groups. See page 302 for more information on the view groups. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window.

306

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Measurement Menu

Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect and remove devices. The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. These same commands can be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you can edit script files. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers command will empty the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file. Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

307

Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.

Device Properties (p.66), General Properties (p.73), Measurement Properties (p. 70), Notification Properties (p.58), and Script Properties (p.151) dialogs can be accessed through this menu. By selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for example, if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it. The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements. If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands. The following functions can be found in this menu. Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device. Band Lock (page 173) Cell Barring (page 179) Channel Locking (page 169) Handover/Handoff Control (page 174) Missing Neighbor Detection (page 181) Cell Testing (page 180) Timeslot Testing (page 185)

308

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Playback Menu

The Playback menu offers you commands for the playback of measurement data. The same commands can also be executed by means of toolbar buttons. With the Play, Pause, and Stop commands you can control the playback. You can also add markers and textual notes in the playback file.

Data Menu
Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. You can also access the Open Custom Window dialog (see p.315).

Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you select New, Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type. By right-clicking the Spectrum Graph item you are able to see the static line graph displaying spectrum scanning results. By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed via edit marker window.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

309

The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. Events grids list, by default, all measurement events but the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed. Parameters grids display selected network parameters. Statistics grids list various statistics, such as, the number of PDP context activation attempts, successes, and failures from the measurement. Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3, RLC/MAC, and LLC messages. Table grids provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances. For example, the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e.g., system, carrier, scrambling code, etc.). The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet capture files in playback mode. The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see page 281). The Map item opens a map window (see page 246).

310

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Save as Custom Window item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The custom windows are presented on page 315. The Save Changes option saves changes to measurement windows. For example, if you resize the windows, Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program.

Window Menu

The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. You can switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically, and Arrange Icons commands. With the Close All command you can close all windows at once. The active window is marked with a check mark .

Help Menu

The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics. By selecting the License Information item, you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. From the About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application, including the contact information and the application version number.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

311

CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS


Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. To edit the contents of menus, to add new menus, or edit the toolbars, right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and select Customize.

In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog, type a name for the new toolbar and click OK.

312

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the Delete button.

In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Drag commands from the list to a toolbar or menu.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

313

To remove commands from a toolbar or menu, drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content, open the Customize dialog (rightclick on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page, select the toolbar or menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button.

314

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. For example, you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations.

You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. Open the Customize dialog, right-click on a button, and select Change Button Image.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

315

NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS


The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for first-time users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save them for later use.

Custom Windows
Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. They are also accessible through the parameter tree. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid types. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window).

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open from the table on the right and click Open.

316

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom Window. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. After clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some custom windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button. The Quick Windows bar (go to View, and select Quick Windows) in Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Click on one of the quick windows, and select a custom window from the list. Click OK. The next time you click on the same quick window button, that selected custom window will appear.

Parameter Tree Search Functionality


A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and possible alias names. In addition, the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.e. HSDPA BLER search string matches, for example, HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

317

Devices View

The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs. The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By doubleclicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs. For example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog. It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected multiple devices, you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices.

318

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Selected Data Protocol field, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP, etc.) used in the measurements. Measurement servers button opens the Measurement Servers dialog (p. 33) where you can connect to Nemo Invex servers. Note that this button is activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license includes the Nemo Invex option. Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you can choose to add a new device or remove the selected device. Measurement control button offers access to some commands that are supported by the selected device, such as, start/stop voice call, GPRS attach/detach, SMS/MMS message sending. Measurement settings button offers access to configuration and properties dialogs. The selection is device-specific. Device connection settings button opens the Phone Properties (p. 66), Scanner Properties (p. 68) or GPS Properties (p. 69) dialog depending on the device selected. Device measurement settings button opens the Measurement Properties - Measurement Settings page (p. 73) for the selected device. Device notification settings button opens the Measurement Properties - Notifications page (p. 59) for the selected device. Device script settings button opens the Measurement Properties - Script page (p. 101) for the selected device. Group devices by type/server button organizes the devices in the view.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

319

Device Status View

The Device Status view displays the device status. The green light at the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected.

320

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view.

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

321

Output Window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons ( ) next to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup menu.

Script Status Window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available when making scanner measurements. From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current measurement.

Controlling Windows
You can have several windows open at the same time. The minimizing, maximizing, and closing functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. The active window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows Control Panel to indicate an active window (see your Microsoft Windows Documentation). You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main window.

Cascade Windows
The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. You can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that window (except for the Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons in the top right corner). You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top left corner of the window).

322

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Tile Windows
The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side, filling the whole space so that all windows are visible at the same time. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically.

Arrange Icons
The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the main window, starting from the left side. To do this, select the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu.

Close All
The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the Nemo Outdoor main window.

Saving Window Settings


If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor, activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Clicking the command will result on a check mark ; the second click will remove the mark.

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW


In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. E.g. in the example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

323

324

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

LOW THROUGHPUT
In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity, server or transmission problems. In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. Other things that could help troubleshooting: Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. Try another FTP server for comparison. Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also try different servers. For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed. For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG

325

All Windows Versions


How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark: 1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor: 1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor. 2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

11. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.): 1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function. TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window.

12. A measurement file (.nmf) does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed.

326

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Windows XP
Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. If the registry value is missing, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB.

Windows Vista/Windows7
Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This registry entry can be removed. If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. Outdoor 5.40 and later checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:


1. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.

2. Type netsh interface tcp show global

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state. Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. 4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click and select Run as administrator.

TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG

327

5. To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. However, Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled. 6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted. 7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations: disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535). highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value, very conservatively. restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

328

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

DEVICE STATUS VIEW


The Device Status view displays the device status.

If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is functioning normally. If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device, rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.

CANNOT ADD DEVICES


If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see page 13 for more information on copy protection. If the copy protection dongle is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG

329

CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS


If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu , check that you have devices online. The Work offline or online button should be unselected.

PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS


The Windows XP and Vista operating systems sometimes confuse a GPS receiver with the computers mouse. When this occurs, the mouse stops working correctly. In this case, follow the steps below. 1. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel. Double-click on System. 2. Go to the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button. 3. Double-click on Mice and other pointing devices. A Microsoft Serial BallPoint device should appear. 4. Right click on the Microsoft Serial BallPoint device and select Disable from the popup menu. 5. Confirm the disabling by clicking Yes in the message box. 6. The mouse device is now disabled and the GPS device can be reconnected.

MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION


Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0" Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or later.

330

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS


TOOLBAR BUTTONS
These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Title Open Playback File(s) Button Description Opens an existing measurement for playback Opens an existing workspace file. Saves the current workspace configuration. Opens the Configuration Manager dialog. Switches the offline mode on and off. Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement. Starts the playback with the selected files. Pauses the playback/recording. Stops the playback/recording. Switches a script on/off. Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map. Adds a textual note in the measurement file. Opens the Open Custom Window dialog. Saves the active window as a new custom window. Saves changes to the active custom window. Saves the active window as an image file (.jpg).

Open Workspace Save Workspace Configuration Manager Work Offline Start Recording

Start Playback Pause Stop Start/Stop Scripts Add Marker

Add Textual Note Open Custom Window Save As New Custom Window Save Changes to Custom Window Save As Image

NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS

331

DIALOG BUTTONS
These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor. Title Expand Device Info Window Device notification settings Button Description Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window. Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification. Through the Device Commands button you have access to various mobile specific functions. Offers access to several dialogs. Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. Updates information in the Configuration Manager. Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager. Adds a new device, event trigger, or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager. Removes the selected device, event trigger, or script from the Configuration Manager.

Device Commands

Device Settings Autodetect Devices Refresh

Properties

Add

Remove

332

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS


These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs. Title Hide Layer Button Description Hides the selected layer in the graph

Remove Layer

Removes the selected layer

New Layer

Opens the New Layer dialog where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph. Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer. Moves the selected layer down in the layer view Moves the selected layer up in the layer view If there are two or more layers in a graph, you can view them in stacked mode; that is, in separate graphs. When the button is pressed down, the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds. Displays the info panel with numerical values on the right side of the graph.

Layer Properties

Move Layer Down Move Layer Up Set Stacked Mode

Autoscroll

Show Panels

NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS

333

MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS


These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps. Title Open Map Button Description Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file. Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst). Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Available only in the Indoor map. Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties. With the automatic map find feature the user can easily locate all maps from same location. Creates a route plan from an open measurement. Through this item you can open saved route plans. Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf). Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Changes the cursor into an arrow, which you can use for selecting items. Changes the cursor into a hand, which you can use for dragging the map to a different position. Place the hand on the map. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map. Changes the cursor into the center tool, which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered.

Save Map

Import Map

Layer Properties

Find Map at Position

Create Route Plan Open Route Plan Save Route Plan Add Waypoint

Arrow

Pan

Center

334

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Zoom In

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming in on the map. Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming out on the map. Clears the measurement route from the map. This button is active only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback. With the Auto Center tool activated, the map view will always center on the test vehicle. This requires that a GPS receiver is used. The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool. The higher the percentage, the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route. Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view, for example, if you have moved the map with the Pan tool. Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map after zooming in. With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map. Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the map window. With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points.

Zoom Out

Clear Route

Set Current Location

Auto Center

Auto Center Sensitivity

Previous View

Entire Map

Entire Route

Scale Bar

Measure Distance

NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS

335

Side Panel

Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel in the map window.

336

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

SHORTCUT KEYS
This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS

337

NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS
Below are described the default notification symbols. Attach Attempt Attach Failed Attach Success MMS Receiving Attempt MMS Receiving Failed MMS Receiving Success MMS Sending Attempt Call Alerting Call Answered Call Attempt Call Connected Call Disconnect Call Dropped Call Failed Call Received Packet Call Attempt Packet Call Connected Packet Call Disconnected Packet Call Failed Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA Packet Technology Changed to UMTS Cell Change Attempt Cell Change Failed Cell Change Success Cell Reselection Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM RX Level Low/Bad Routing Area Update Attempt Routing Area Update Failed Context Activation Attempt Context Activation Failed Context Activation Success Context Deactivation Semiduplex Call Attempt Service Lost Routing Area Update Success PTT Idle PTT Receiving PTT Transmitting MMS Sending Failed MMS Sending Success

338

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Service Received Data Call Attempt Data Connection Attempt Data Connection Failed Data Connection Success Data Disconnect Data Transfer Attempt Data Transfer Success Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Failure Soft Handover Success SMS Received SMS Receiving Attempt SMS Receiving Failed SMS Sending Completed

Dead Reckoning in Use Detach Differential GPS in Use Duplex Call Attempt FER High

TX Power High/UL Power Up High

Video Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI) Voice Call Connected (ETSI) Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)

GPS Fix Lost GPS Fix Received HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed

Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)

Star Thumb Down

Handover Attempt Handover Failed Handover Success

Thumb Up

Location Area Update Attempt Location Area Update Failed Location Area Update Success

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS

339

Marker Markov Call Attempt Measurement Error

340

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT


If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo Outdoor, please contact our Nemo Outdoor technical support service at Nemo.Helpdesk@anite.com or call +358 50 395 7800. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.

INTERNET SUPPORT
At our web site http://www.anite.com/nemo, you can find all the frequently asked questions about Nemo Outdoor, among other information.

USER CLUB
The Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it at our WWW site http://www.anite.com/nemo. Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the user club, please complete an on-line registration form. After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and password by email in a few days time. Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day. If you have questions relating to the Nemo User Club, please e-mail us at nemo.helpdesk@anite.com.

PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT


During the warranty period, the phone and fax support related to potential software errors is free of additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support. When faxing or emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support Agreement.

NEM O O UTDO O R S UP PO RT

341

Please contact us at the following locations:


Global Email Tel. Fax Address nemo.helpdesk@anite.com +358 50 395 7800 +358 8 551 6182 Anite Finland Ltd Kiviharjunlenkki 1 D 90220 Oulu Finland

Americas Email Mobile Fax Address

nemo.helpdeskt@anite.com +1 469 951 9105 +1 469 774 4608 (En espaol e portugus) +1 972 462 1640 Anite Inc. 6225 N. State Hwy 161 Suite 425 Irving, TX 75038 USA

APAC Email Tel. Fax Address

nemo.helpdesk@anite.com +65 9746 2431 +65 6254 9885 Anite Singapore Pte. Ltd. 101 Thomson Road, #20-05 United Square Singapore 307591

P.R. China Email Tel. Fax Address

nemo.helpdesk@anite.com +86 10 6567 8528 +86 10 6567 8521

Anite Wireless Trading (Beijing) Limited.


Room 2109, 21st Floor The Exchange Beijing, No. Yi 118, Jianguo Road Chaoyang District, Beijing 100022 China

When contacting us for problem reporting, please supply/inform us of: Your Windows version number (e.g., Windows XP), see Windows Control Panel | System Your computer brand model (e.g., Lenovo) Your test mobile types (e.g., Nokia 6720) GPS receiver type (e.g., Garmin GPS II Plus) Your Nemo Outdoor version and build (e.g., Version 5.xx.x), see Help | About Device handler versions Your description of the problem Whether you were able to repeat the problem The corresponding measurement results file (as email attachment or on disc)

342

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

APPENDIX 1
INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD
This appendix describes how to install a PCMCIA serial I/O card to create additional COM ports for your computer. If you are using a USB serial converter, see the setup guide included in the converter product package.

To install a PCMCIA serial I/O card:


1. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computers PCMCIA slot. 2. If you have not installed the I/O drivers, the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. 3. When the update is complete or if you have installed the I/O drivers earlier, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). You should now be able to see the installed driver and the COM port it is using. The COM port number is important, as you need to define it in the Nemo Outdoor configuration settings. 4. Restart your computer.

Use the COM ports created with the PCMCIA serial card for GPS receivers and/or scanners. If possible, always use the fixed COM ports of your computer to connect the test devices.

APPE NDI X 2

343

APPENDIX 2
You can have three kinds of Socket cards: single, dual, and Quad. After you have installed the dual socket card drivers, you can check the COM ports from My Computer | Control Panel.

344

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

By double-clicking on the Socket Dual I/O icon the Socket Dual I/O Properties dialog is opened.

The First Port Name and Second Port Name display the COM ports used by the socket card (in this example COM3 and COM6, respectively). The ports can be used for connecting the GPS receiver and the Scanner.

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET


This appendix describes how to connect the GPS receiver to the computer when using PCMCIA socket.

To connect the GPS receiver to the computers PCMCIA socket:


1. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computers PCMCIA slot. 2. If you have not installed the socket I/O drivers, the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. 3. When the update is complete or if you have installed the socket I/O drivers earlier, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). You should now be able to see the installed driver and also the COM port it is using. 4. If you need to restart your computer, do it at this point. After restarting, plug the GPS receiver in to the PCMCIA card cable. 5. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager dialog and detect the GPS receiver either manually or using the Autodetect function.

APPE NDI X 3

345

APPENDIX 3
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS
Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into MapInfo. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you create in MapInfo. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a map window. Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo can read the following types of raster images: - filename.TIF - filename.GIF - filename.JPG - filename.PCX - filename.BMP - filename.BIL Color options are: Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white. Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray. Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images.

Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo SW


If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map image so that MapInfo can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map.

To register a raster map:


1. Start the MapInfo software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen. 2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.

346

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates in meters. Using the MapBasic program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees 4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and selected in the map window. 5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster map will be displayed in the map window. 6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. 7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

APPE NDI X 5

347

APPENDIX 4
CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR
You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device Settings .

In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.

You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin. Directory number defines a phone number

348

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal MIN2 defines a three-digit area code SPC defines the service programming code IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2

On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved PRLs onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.

APPE NDI X 5

349

Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for prl using the search tool on the main page.

1. Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.

2. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when launched. This will add a tool bar called Presto to MS Excel.

350

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.

4. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.

5. Click Next in the Welcome window. 6. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next. 7. Click Next to confirm installation. 8. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog. 9. Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO. It should look as follows in Excel:

APPE NDI X 5

351

APPENDIX 5
NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION
Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop, it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator. The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on different system technologies and networks with support for up to seven test devices such as mobiles, scanners, and a GPS device, and the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers simultaneously while connected to a single laptop. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a cars +12VDC power output. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. With the high-quality Neutrik USB connectors and the professional lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use, preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional ruggedized rollaround carrying case. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. Nemo Outdoor Multi can be delivered with or without the carrying case. These two options are elaborated on below.

352

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS


Nemo Outdoor Multi comes in two options: with or without the case. With the carrying case option, all of the common components listed below will be included. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered without the case, only some of the common components will be included in the package.

Common Components
Carrying case

Mobile holder panel, test terminals


The mobile holder panel is by default attached to the lid of the multi carrying case, but can also be semi-permanently mounted into a test vehicle, for example, on the car back seat.

APPE NDI X 5

353

MMAC3 unit
The MMAC3 unit is placed on the bottom layer of the carrying case, or it can also be used without the carrying case. In the latter instance, see page 360.

Mounting plate
The MMAC3 unit is attached to the mounting plate and placed either in the multi carrying case or alternatively can be attached to a location in the test vehicle.

354

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Mascot 12V Pure Sine Wave Inverter


The inverter provides power for the laptop on which Nemo Outdoor is running, or alternatively for an Anritsu scanner or for any other device which uses the 110 or 220 voltage. The inverter converts +12V into +110V or +220V depending on the requirements of the market area. The operating voltage of the inverter is a constant +12V. The inverter should be connected directly to the car battery. Note that the inverter should be taken out of the carrying case when in use, or it may overheat!

APPE NDI X 5

355

Power cables
Nemo Outdoor Multi comes with four external power cables. Two of the cables (1,2) are meant for the Multi carrying case and two for the MMAC3 unit (3,4). The MMAC3 cables are only needed if you want to mount the MMAC3 unit into the car instead of keeping it in the carrying case. If the MMAC3 unit is placed in the carrying case, it is directly connected to the connector panel of the multi carrying case. Both the carrying case and the MMAC3 unit have one cable to attach the unit to the car 12V socket, and one cable for fixed installation in the test vehicle. Product code Cable External power cable description Length: 4m (13.12 ft) Function: Enables the Multi carrying case to be connected to the car 12V socket. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector.

1046-C-025

1041-C-040

Length: 5m (16,40 ft) Function: used when multi carrying case unit is used for fixed installation in a test vehicle. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector.

1041-C-038

Length: 4m (13.12 ft) Function: is used to connect the MMAC3 unit to the car 12V socket when you want to use the MMAC3 without the carrying case.

356

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

1041-C-039

Length: 4m (13.12 ft) Function: You can use this external power cable for the MMAC3 unit for fixed installation in a car in instances when you want to use the MMAC3 unit without its carrying case. The car 12V socket provides a constant +12V.

Laptop
The Nemo Outdoor Multi system runs on a single laptop with Nemo Outdoor installed on it. The laptop is connected to the sine wave power inverter. The power inverter converts 12V to 110V or 220V depending on the requirements of the market area.

Optional components
Scanner
It is possible to use one PCTEL EX or PCTEL EX mini scanner at a time with Nemo Outdoor Multi. If the scanner has been delivered with the carrying case, it will come mounted into the case, and connected to the MMAC3 USB port. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for more details.

APPE NDI X 5

357

USB Soundcard for Voice Quality measurements


If you have purchased a TerraTec USB sound card with your Nemo Outdoor Multi, please refer to the Voice Quality guide for further instructions.

External antennas
The external antennas can be placed on the middle panel which has a special magnet board to keep them in their place. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered with the carrying case option, it is possible to use external antennas.

MMAC3 WITH CASE


When Nemo Outdoor Multi is purchased with the carrying case, all of the common components mentioned above are included. The optional components remain optional, so not part of the default package. The MMAC3 carrying case consists of three main parts: lid, top level and bottom level. The test terminals are mounted onto the terminal holder panel, and a middle panel divides the case into two parts.

Lid
The case lid holds the mobile holder panel. However, the mobile holder panel can alternatively also be removed from the lid and semi-mounted, for example, onto the test vehicle back seat. When attached to the lid, the mobile holder panel is covered with soft padding which has openings for the test terminals, and grooves on the inside leading the cables into the case and to the MMAC3 unit.

358

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The mobile holder panel can support up to six test terminals which can be secured in place with the help of Velcro tapes. The Nemo Outdoor application supports up to five test mobiles at the time of printing this manual. Note that the lid must always be open when performing measurements, or otherwise the system may overheat.

Connector Box

The MMAC3 POWER switch turns on the MMAC3 unit. Most of the time it is recommended that both the MMAC3 POWER and the MAIN POWER switches are turned on when the Multi system is in used. The MAIN POWER switch turns on the Multi system when it is connected to either the car +12V socket or the car battery. The switch also provides power for the optional scanner. Both the MAIN POWER and MMAC3 POWER switches must be turned on when the Multi system is in use. If only MMAC3 POWER switch is turned on, MMAC3 unit uses its internal back-up battery. The back-up battery is intended for short power failures. However it makes it possible to measure up to approximately 45-60 minutes without external power supply. The MMAC3 USB connector is connected to the laptop USB port with a USB data cable. Please remember to connect the data cable to same USB port in the laptop after its initial installation. The MMAC3 unit with the test terminals and other devices connected to it are connected to the MMAC3 USB connectors other end underneath the connector box. This way the MMAC3 unit with its devices are connected to the car power source and with the laptop PWR CONNECTOR is meant for the Nemo Outdoor Multi main external power cable. There are two cables available in the system, depending on whether it is to be connected to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. The USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors are meant for external devices such as the GPS devices, the optional scanner or optional USB soundcard for Voice Quality measurements.

APPE NDI X 5

359

Carrying case
The Multi measurement system comes divided into two levels by a middle panel.

Bottom level

Below the middle panel you will find the following items: 1) MMAC3 unit 2) Optional USB soundcard for voice quality measurements 3) Optional scanner 4) Test terminal car chargers 5) Lockable USB bushings for the test terminal data cables

Top level

The top level holds the following items: 1) Mascot DC to AC 12V pure Sine Wave Inverter for the laptop 2) Magnet board for external antennas. 3) Straps for holding cables in place during the transportation of the carrying case. The straps can be tightened.

360

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4) You can lift the middle panel by the handles on the left- and right- hand sides of the carrying case. Note that you should use separate cigarette lighter sockets in the car for the MMAC3 multi unit and for the laptop, otherwise the car fuse risks burning.

MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE

The MMAC3 unit can also be delivered on its own, without the case. In this case the components included in the package are as follows.

MMAC3 unit

The MMAC3 unit is placed on the mounting plate. See below.

APPE NDI X 5

361

Mounting plate

Belt

The belt holds the MMAC3 unit in its place on the mounting plate. Note that the belt is no longer included in the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi package.

USB A to USB B data cable

362

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

External power cable

Screws

USB bushing

APPE NDI X 5

363

Mobile holder panel

Item 1. MMAC3 unit 2. Mounting plate 3. Belt 4. USB-A to USB-B cable 3 m 5. External power cable 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16 7. Hex Nut DIN 985 M4 8. Screw DIN 7981C 4.2x16 9. USB bushing 10. Mobile holder panel

Code MMAC3 1041-P-00 1041-P-01 1041-C-038 1041-P-033 800-0324-818

364

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION


Without Carrying Case
The graph below shows the different components of the MMAC3 system.

Compiling the MMAC3 system


1. Attach the screws (see above, 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16) in the holes shown below. This enables you to attach the MMAC3 unit on a surface in the test vehicle.

APPE NDI X 5

365

13. Place the MMAC3 box into the mounting plate.

14. The MMAC3 unit is now ready to be used once all the cables and test devices have been attached to it.

366

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

With Carrying Case


Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use, otherwise it may risk overheating! Below you will see the system in a graph.

APPE NDI X 5

367

Compiling the MMAC3 system


1. Open the case locks. There are a total of six locks on three sides of the carrying case. Lift the clasp and turn it to open the case.

15. Connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to a power source in the car. There are two ways of connecting the Multi system to a power source in the car: either to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. These two options are listed below. a) Non-fixed installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to the car 12V socket using the external power cable with the code 1046-C-025 (see cable 1 on p. 355.). Connect the plug of the power cable to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the plug until it locks to place. Next, connect the cigarette lighter end of the cable to the car 12V socket. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it out.

368

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

b) Fixed Installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system directly to the vehicle battery. Connect the cable plug (code 1041-C-040) to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the cable until it locks to place. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the plug until it is released and you can pull it out. Attach the other end of the cable to the car battery.

16. Connect the possible optional USB devices such as GPS, second scanner etc to the USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors. 17. The GPS antennas are placed on the vehicle roof in order to maximize the RF qualities of the antenna. The middle panel contains an iron board which is meant for the antennas. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the roof corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz = 66 cm (25.98) = 37 cm (14.56) = 33 cm (12. 99)

1800 MHz = 17 cm (6.69) 1900 MHz = 16 cm (6.29) 2100 MHz = 14,5 cm (5.7) GPS antenna 1565- 1575 MHz = 19 cm (7.48)

With a GPS antenna, distance from the corner is not important. However, especially within the following frequency range 1800- 1900 MHz, the mobile antennas can interfere with the GPS receiver.

APPE NDI X 5

369

Place all antenna away from roof racks or any other obstructions. Bring the cables from the antennas into the vehicle. Be careful not to pinch the cables with metal parts in any way that would damage them.

It is possible to use external antennae with the carrying case, in which event the antennas are attached directly to the test terminals. 18. Place the middle panel back in the carrying case. Take the Mascot DC to AC power inverter out of the carrying case and place it on a steady surface in the vehicle. Connect the power cable that came with it directly to the car battery. 19. Turn on the Multi system. The MMAC3 Power switch provides power solely for the MMAC3 unit. The Main PWR switch provides power for the whole system when the system is connected to the vehicle.

Green light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the internal back up battery power source. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. When the light is off, it means that the device is off, or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty.

370

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

20. Connect the PC to the MMAC3 USB connector using the B data cable. Attach one end of the data cable to a port in the laptop and the other to the MMAC USB port. Windows will automatically recognize the device. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware, where you should be able to see the Generic USB Hub under Universal Serial Bus controllers.

21. Connect the test terminals to the MMAC3 box and to the laptop. Check that each phone has a SIM card in it and that the battery is in place. See the phones manual for further instructions on how to do this. 22. If the system was purchased without a laptop it is recommended to install all required drivers for all test devices. All drivers can be found on the CD that comes with the delivery. Connect the test terminals to the USB connectors in the MMAC3 unit one by one. Especially when the installation process is done for the first time, it is a lot easier to handle the installation process one terminal at a time. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further instructions on how to connect each phone to the computer (via the MMAC3 unit) and on how to set up a dial-up connection and add the device to Nemo Outdoor on the laptop. Once installation with the first terminal is done proceed with next one until all terminals and test devices are installed. If the optional scanner is included and reassembled inside the carrying case, install also the driver that comes with the scanner before connecting the USB data cable to the laptop. 23. Each phones USB cable is secured in a bushing which keeps the data cable securely in place. The bushing is closed with screws, and the USB cable inserted in the USB connector in the MMAC3 unit. When tightening the screw the USB cable with the bushing is locked in place to the MMAC3 unit.

APPE NDI X 5

371

Removing data cable with USB bushing from MMAC3


1. Unscrew the Torx screw. 2. Pull out the screw and pull out the top part of USB bushing. After that, pull out the data cable from the USB port. Next, pull out the lower part of the USB bushing and store the parts to a secure place for future use.

Installing data cable with USB bushing to MMAC3


1. Plug in the USB data cable to a USB port in the MMAC3 unit. 2. Install the lower part of the USB bushing to the USB port, and press the data cable from the top so that the data cable fits inside the lower part of the USB bushing as shown in the picture above. 3. Next, install the top part of the USB bushing to the USB port and if needed use a bit of force to press it together with the lower part. Use a torx screw to tighten and lock the data cable to the MMAC3 unit. Please tighten the screw as tight as possible till the connection is secure.

Note that these power sockets are meant solely for test terminal use, not for scanners! If a scanner is connected with the socket, the fuse risks overheating. 4. The MMAC3 unit has six USB A connectors at the front for terminals, the GPS device and the optional scanner. On the back side there are two USB connectors: one USB B connector which is already connected to the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel, and the other which is a USB A connector meant primarily for the optional scanner. However, it can be used for other USB devices as well. The optional soundcard can be connected, for example, to the laptop. See the Nemo Voice Quality Guide for further instructions on how to set up the voice quality system. The MMAC3 unit is connected to the laptop through the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. If you have purchased an optional scanner, please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for instructions on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor. 5. Nemo Outdoor Multi is now ready to be used for measurements.

372

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

APPENDIX 6
NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL
Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop, it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator. The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/USB modems, a scanner and a sound card. In addition, the system in combination with the Nemo Outdoor Multi -option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications


Interfaces

One USB 2.0 compliant B port (In) Seven USB 2.0 compliant ports (Out) Main Power Switch/LED Neutrik +12V Lockable Power Connector (NL2MP)

Complies with the following standards


300 019-2-5 V3.0.0 class T5.1 standard (random, bump and shock) vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC, ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III

APPE NDI X 6

373

IP Rated: IP67 EN60529:1991 IEC60529:1989

Lockable USB data cable connections Automatic Pressure Equalization Valve

Power Specification
Input: +12VDC nominal (11.3 - 15VDC range), max 8A Outputs: +12VDC: 0.8A/socket or total 5A Back-up battery capacity: Li-ion 2500 mAh
Operating mode Required power (A) 0.35 1.7 2.2 2.85 Note Input Voltage +12V DC Minimum operating voltage +11.3V DC

Configuration

No devices No devices TerraTec Charging phone x 1

Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via car charger 2 Nokia terminals charged via car charger 3 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 4 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 5 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 6 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers

Not charging Charging

Charging phone x 2

3.45

Charging phone x 3

4.05

Charging phone x 4

4.65

Charging phone x 5

5.25

Charging phone x 6

5.85

No devices No devices TerraTec

Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via USB port 2 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 3 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 4 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5 Nokia terminals charged

0.35 1.7 2.2

Not charging Charging

Minimum operating voltage +10.8V DC (11.3V DC measured)

Charging phone via USB x 1

2.7

USB data cable must be connected to PC. Otherwise USB charging does not work

Charging phone via USB x 2

3.2

Charging phone via USB x 3

3.7

Charging phone via USB x 4 Charging phone via USB x 5

4.2 4.7

374

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

via USB ports Charging phone via USB x 6 6 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5.2

Measurement time with back up battery with sound card and six terminals

~3.5 minutes

Device not connected appears in Nemo Outdoor UI. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals Device not connected appears in Nemo Outdoor UI. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals.

Measurement time with back up battery without sound card with six terminals

~20 minutes

Note that if the same power source is shared with Multi Lite and the PC, the power should always be turned on first in the Multi unit, and only after that on the PC (e.g., if a +12V cigarette lighter socket is used as power source).

Computer Requirements
PC (IBM or Dell recommended) with Windows XP Professional (32 - bit) or Windows Vista (32 bit) For multi data and voice quality measurements Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher 512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended 100MB of free hard disk space for installation and use, 1GB recommended For up to four channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel Quad Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required

APPE NDI X 6

375

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components

Case
Pelican case 1520
Interior 45.9 x 32.7 x 17.1 cm

376

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

(18.06" x 12.89" x 6.72") Exterior 50.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm (19.78" x 15.77" x 7.41") Weight ~ 10.3kg (22.7lbs) (without test terminals and antennas)

Lid organizer
Place for CD, dongle, antennas, USB extension cable (max. 3m), etc. Gas spring

Middle part
Place for up to six terminals Fixed holders, 4 pcs Movable holders with hinge, 2pcs Fan

APPE NDI X 6

377

Bottom part
2500mAh back-up battery PCB/Charger Cigarette lighter sockets Industrial seven port USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card (optional)

378

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Exterior
Carbine hooks (2pcs)

Optional components
Scanner Sound card

Laptop with Nemo Outdoor

Note that from version 5.4 onwards, Nemo Outdoor requires a new dongle which cannot be used with any previous versions of Nemo Outdoor.

APPE NDI X 6

379

Setting Up the System


Multi Lite first-time installation
Upon your purchase of the Multi Lite case and test devices, you will receive the system semiconfigured. This means that the data and audio cables as well as the optional sound card have been set up for you, so there is no need for you to access the bottom part of the case. However, you will need to set up and connect your test devices with Nemo Outdoor. The following instructions will guide you through this process. 1. Open the case latches. 2. Insert the copy protection dongle attached to the case lid organizer to your computer. 3. Next, turn on the PC and run the Nemo Outdoor installation CD. Note that you should make sure that the PC meets the computer requirements mentioned above. Note that prior to connecting the test devices to the PC, make sure that the drivers for the terminal data cables, sound card and scanners have been installed. Refer to the separate Nemo Scanner Guide and to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide documents for instructions. In the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide you will find terminal-specific instructions regarding the drivers. At this point, only focus on driver installation. The dial-up installation will be performed later on. 4. Connect the Multi Lite power cable to the power connector next to the power switch on the connector panel. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, push and turn it to the left until it locks to place. Similarly, when you want to remove the cable connector from the connector panel, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it up. 5. Connect the other end of the cable to the car +12V socket. 6. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB data cable coming from USB hub, and the other end to the PC (max. 3m long) to the laptop.

7. Switch on the Multi unit from the connector panel. Even though the Multi unit can derive power from the laptop, it is not powerful enough for uninterrupted power supply. 8. Attach the test terminals to their mobile holders one by one.

380

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that with Nokia N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. Holders 1-4 are reserved for Voice Quality measurements. For example, the voice quality cable for terminal 1 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 1, the voice quality cable for terminal 2 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 2, and so forth. See page 436 for more information. 9. The layout of the mobile holder configuration is as shown in the image below.

10. Start Nemo Outdoor on the PC. 11. Connect the data cables to the test terminals one by one, and follow the dial-up connection instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Note that the same terminal type can use the same dial-up connection with Nemo Outdoor. Instructions for how to add the device in Nemo Outdoor is included in the dial-up instructions. 12. Connect the chargers to the test terminals, and the other end to the +12V power sockets in the Nemo Multi Lite connector panel. Note also that some terminals are charged via a USB port.

APPE NDI X 6

381

Note that only phones can be connected to the cigarette lighter sockets in the Multi Lite panel. The scanner must at no time be connected to the +12V cigarette lighter socket. If a scanner is connected to one of the sockets, the fuse risks overheating! 13. If you purchased a scanner, connect the scanner USB cable to the laptop. See the Nemo Scanner Guide for more information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

Note that the scanner data cable is connected to the laptop, not to the USB 2.0 hub at the bottom of the Multi Lite case. Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use, otherwise it may risk overheating! 14. In case you change your test terminals to a different model, or need to change data cables or audio cables for any other reason, see below.

Changing Data Cables


1. Disconnect the terminals from the laptop and remove the data cables from the terminals by pulling them out. 2. Use the hex key in the Multi Lite lid organizer pouch to unscrew and remove the middle panel in the case. There are four screws (DIN 912 hex head screws) in the middle panel, and one screw (DIN 912 hex head screw) on either side of the case for attaching mobile holders.

382

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. After removing the screws in the middle panel, lift it from the right-hand side of the case when you are facing it, and attach it to the case lid as shown in the picture sequence below.

1)

2)

APPE NDI X 6

383

3)

4)

4. After removing the middle panel, you will see the USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) in the upper right-hand corner. 5. Turn the thumb screws as illustrated in the picture below to open and remove the hub clamp cover.

384

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

6. Move the hub in the direction shown by the red arrow and lift to remove the cover.

7. Once the cover is removed, you can remove the USB data cables.

8. Next, change the data cables for the new test terminals. If the data cable driver is different from the one used earlier, remember to install the new driver before connecting the data cable to the laptop. Consult the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions. 9. Place and screw the hub clamp cover back into place with the thumb screws, and push the USB 2.0 hub back into its original place. 10. Insert the data cables through the round PGSD-4 openings in the middle panel. They will be connected to the terminals later on after the phones are attached to the mobile holders.

11. If you also need to change audio cables, proceed to the following section.

APPE NDI X 6

385

12. If you are done with changing cables, attach and screw the middle panel back into place. 13. You can now proceed with measurements.

Changing audio cables


1. If you have not already done it, remove the case middle panel as instructed above. 2. Remove the audio cables from the TerraTec sound card. Refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide (p. 412) for more details regarding the sound card setup.

3. Start with measurements.

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi


Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Max. number of terminals Max. number of scanners Max. number of voice quality terminals Pure sine wave inverter (300W) Exterior dimensions 6 1 external 6 No 50.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm (19.78" x 15.77" x 7.41" ) Interior dimensions 45.9 x 32.7 x 17.1 cm (18.06" x 12.89" x 6.72) Weight (Multi Lite without terminals and antennas) Carry-on luggage Back up battery (Li-ion 2500mAh) / charger Industrial USB 2.0 hub, Digi Hubport 7C Comply: 300 019-2-5 V3.0.0 class T5.1 standard vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC, ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III ~10.3kg (22.7lbs) Yes* Yes Yes Yes Nemo Outdoor Multi 6 1 internal 6 Yes 60.4 x 51.0 x 24.6 cm (24.1 x 20.3 x 9.8") 55.3 x 45.2 x 20.8 cm (21.9 x 18.0 x 8.4") ~25kg (55lbs) No Yes Yes Yes

Electrical parts between Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite and Nemo Outdoor Multi are identical including USB hub, PCB, charger, back-up battery, and the TerraTec sound card * Max. allowance varies depending on air lines

386

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE


Nemo Voice Quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendations P.862.1 and P862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. Also measurements based on the WBAMR codec are supported. Nemo Outdoor supports voice quality measurements with three options: with the Nemo Audio Module, the TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card and with the Maya44 USB sound card. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Nemo Audio modules (EVOQs) consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-6 mobiles, 1-6 audio modules, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. EVOQ, i.e. the Nemo audio module, runs in real-time on a DSP board. The supported technologies are GSM, WCDMA, and CDMA2000. For a list of supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6 Fire USB sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-4 mobiles, the TerraTec sound card, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. It is supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform, and it supports the USB 2.0 audio system, four channels, and the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA technologies. For a list of supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Maya44 sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-4 mobiles, the Maya44 sound card, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. If you combine the TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards, you can connect up to 6 test terminals with Nemo Outdoor Multi. With all options, the Nemo Audio Module (EVOQ), the TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound card and the Maya44 sound card it is possible to perform two types of voice quality measurements, mobileto-mobile and fixed-to-mobile measurements.

APPE NDI X 7

387

In mobile-to-mobile measurements, one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

Voice Quality mobile-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Modules

Voice Quality with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card

388

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements, a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end, the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end, and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Module

Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with TerraTec DMX 6 Fire Sound Card

APPE NDI X 7

389

VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


Mobile-to-Fixed Line
When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server, the server answers the call and Nemo Outdoor/EVOQ/sound card audio module starts sending the configured test sample. The server records 1.5 seconds of incoming audio, after which it compares the recorded sample and chooses the best matching sample from the default samples unless sample forcing is not used on server side. After the identification, the server sends the identified, non-degraded sample to Nemo Outdoor that records it and calculates the PESQ score (MOS DL). Along with the test samples, short synchronization tone is sent. They are used for synchronization purposes and do not affect the PESQ score. The synchronization tone is always sent from the side which sends the audio sample. For example, with mobile-to-fixed-line testing synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile/ EVOQ/sound card audio module to the server. After receiving the test sample, Nemo Outdoor sends the same sample to the server. This time the server recognizes the sample, records it for the duration of the identified sample, calculates the score (MOS UL), opens a measurement file, and stores the result there. The measurement file on server side is closed when the line is dropped, or after a user-defined time that can be adjusted via the Nemo Server Manager application. The test goes on alternating until a call drops, or until Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Server ends the call. If the server does not detect the line drop, e.g. when busy tone detection has not been performed, it takes up to 30 seconds for the server to hang up the line automatically.

390

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Mobile-to-Mobile
The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line. Note that the synchronization algorithm has been changed for the EVOQ audio module. The change and description above applies to firmware version 2.8 and Nemo Server 2.0.0, and later. PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use. Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be done before use.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ)


Setting Up the System
This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software first. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor user manual for detailed instructions.

Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing


The image below exemplifies the voice quality module and cable setup.

In the following four parts, the terminal-specific cables will be listed, and the setup exemplified with a picture.

APPE NDI X 7

391

Note that all audio cables need to be inserted with the red dot facing upwards. Product Code 100244-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia terminals compatible with CA-86US v.2 data cables including: -6230i, 6630, 6680, N75 and N80. -If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 10014900 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) Nokia DKU-2/CA-86US v.2 audio/ data cable (420008-00) -Ground Type: Differential Ground (425000-01)

1)

2) 3) 4)

Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.

392

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Product Code 100245-00

Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95 series terminals including: Nokia 95 and Nokia 95US. If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

1)

2)

3) 4)

Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.

APPE NDI X 7

393

Product Code 100246-00

Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia 3500 and 612x series terminals. Included are Nokia 3500, 6120 and Nokia 6121. If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) 2.5mm 4-P-RCA male audio cable (420042-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

1)

2)

3) 4)

Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.

394

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Product Code 100247-00

Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG LHD-200E terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

Configuration -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) 425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle

100248-00

Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8000 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

100249-00

Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8100 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

100250-00

Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8300 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

APPE NDI X 7

395

(426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 100255-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG- KX 206 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002)

1)

1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) 3) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) Note that the WHITE RCA female connector must be connected to RED RCA male connector,
and that the YELLOW RCA female connector must be connected to the WHITE RCA male connector.

396

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. The following section will provide information on how to connect the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device.

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device


When there are two or more audio modules in use, the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC2 Multi device. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will blink red, amber, or green. Please observe the led during installation and use as it will indicate whether the Multi unit is working properly or not. Red: This light signifies the loss of USB communication with the host. If the loss is due to unplugging the unit, the light will blink red a few times before turning green when it is reconnected. Otherwise, the light indicates a problem with the (Edgeport/8) drivers, which may need to be reinstalled. The red will also blink during installation until the installation is complete. Amber (orange): This light signifies serial port activity on the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8). The amber light may also flash briefly during installation. Green: This light indicates that the serial ports are successfully set up and the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8) is operating normally.

Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device:


1. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer, insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk with the Edgeport/8 driver file into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Switch on the computer. Switch on power in Multi holder from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. 3. Connect the USB cable to the Multi holder and the other end to your computer. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically.

APPE NDI X 6

397

4. Windows will detect the new Edgeport/8 device. Drivers are found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. Click Yes in the Digital Signature Not Found dialog if it appears. Windows 2000 may find many new devices. Wait until the process is finished. 5. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab click the Device Manager button). Double-click on Ports. There should be eight new COM ports. If not, start from the beginning.

Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e.g., COM49), Port2 is the second new COM port (e.g., COM50), etc.

398

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Connecting Voice Quality Devices - MMAC2


Please complete the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi installation first as the Voice Quality devices are connected to the COM port provided by the Multi mobile holder. 1. As described in the Multi device set-up, there are eight new COM ports. Connect the trace cable between the audio module and the MMAC unit. Insert plug A in a serial port on the MMAC unit and plug B on the connector marked COM on the audio module.

Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e.g., COM49), Port2 is the second new COM port (e.g., COM50), etc.

APPE NDI X 6

399

2. Use the three-headed DKU-2 trace/audio cable to connect the test terminal and the audio module. Insert plug A to the test terminal, plug B to a free USB port on your computer/MMAC unit, and plug C to the connector marked Phone on the audio module.

400

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. Connect the power cable between the audio modules and the MMAC unit. Insert the A plugs to the connectors marked Power on the audio modules and B plug in the front panel of the MMAC unit. A green led should light up.

4. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone Properties dialog is opened.

APPE NDI X 6

401

5. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

6. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

402

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or to second highest level with N95 and other 2.5/3.5mm jack plug headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. 8. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the audio module. You are now ready to start the measurements.

APPE NDI X 6

403

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device


When there are two or more audio modules in use, the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC3 Multi device. Note that with Nokia N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi option without the carrying case.

404

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi system with the carrying case option.

There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will show green, red, yellow or no light depending on the power usage of Nemo Outdoor Multi, as described below. Green light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the internal back-up battery power source. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. When the light is off, it means that the device is off, or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty.

Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device:


1. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer, insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Switch on the computer. Switch on power in Multi from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. 3. Connect the USB cable to the Multi and the other end to your computer. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically.

APPE NDI X 6

405

4. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel). Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab, click on the Device Manager button). Double-click on the Universal Serial Bus Controllers item. You should be able to see the Generic USB Hub item.

For instructions on how to set up the MMAC3 system, refer to the Nemo Outdoor manual. However, below you will find instructions on how to connect the voice quality devices with MMAC3 Multi unit.

406

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Connecting EVOQ audio modules with MMAC3


The voice quality system is shown below. The graph shows the system on the whole.

APPE NDI X 6

407

The following picture shows the setup with an MMAC3 Multi unit, the voice quality plate, three voice quality (EVOQ) modules, an Edgeport, and one voice quality test mobile. Please refer to the Nemo Server manual for information on how to connect the Voice Quality system with the server.

1. The voice quality plate is attached to the MMAC3 unit with screws (see the red arrows). The black arrows above indicate the screws that go in the slots underneath the voice quality (EVOQ) box to keep it in place. 2. Insert plug A of the serial cable in a serial port in the Edgeport box, and plug B in the COM port in the voice quality (EVOQ) box. One end of the A to B data cable (C) goes to Edgeport, and the other end to the laptop computer.

408

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

24. The voice quality boxes are all connected to the back of the MMAC3 unit (D). The MMAC3 unit is connected to a power source through a power cable (E). Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual for information on how to connect the MMAC3 unit to a power source.

25. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone Properties dialog is opened.

APPE NDI X 6

409

26. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

27. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

410

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

28. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or level 4 with N95 and other 2.5/3.5mm jack plug headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. 29. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the terminal used with the EVOQ module, the module needs to be modified accordingly. The terminals are either used by common ground cables or differential ground cables. The table below shows the terminal model and ground type. Terminal Nokia terminals 6230i, 6630, 6650, 6651, 6680, N75, N80 Nokia N95, Nokia 7376, 6120, 6121, 3500, 6720 LG VX8X00 series Differential Ground Yes Common Ground Jumper J9 in place No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

If the purchased voice quality system includes both differential and common ground terminals, the EVOQ modules are by default set for differential ground.

APPE NDI X 6

411

Disassembling the EVOQ Module


1. Remove the cover from EVOQ module by unscrewing the four M4*6 screws.

2. Remove the pc board from the box by unscrewing the screws shown in picture 2.0. Make sure you are ESD protected to avoid damaging the pc board.

3. Install jumper J9 in place as shown in the picture below.

412

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Assembling the EVOQ Module


Place the pc board back into the box and tighten the screws. Place the cover on top of the box and tighten the screws.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY TERRATEC SOUND CARD


Nemo Voice Quality TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data
USB 2.0 audio system 1 microphone input with gain control (combo XLR / 6.3 mm jack) 48V phantom power -20 dB pad switch 1 instrument input with gain control (6.3 mm jack) 4 analogue inputs (cinch) 1 phono input (RCA cinch) with RIAA equaliser and gain control 6 analogue outputs (cinch) Stereo to 5.1 Surround Expander 1 headphone jack (6.3 mm) with separate volume controller 1 optical digital input/output (TOS Link) 1 coaxial digital input/output (cinch) 1 MIDI interface In/Out (5-pin DIN) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (input 1/2) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 105 dB (A) SNR* (input 3/4) 24 bit / 192 kHz D/A converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (outputs 1-6) WDM driver for Windows XP SP2 / Vista ASIO 2.0 support Control panel for Windows XP SP2 / Vista System Requirements o o o o o 2.0 GHz Intel or AMD CPU Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP X64 or Windows Vista or Windows Vista X64 512 MB RAM 1 free USB 2.0 port CD/DVD drive

APPE NDI X 6

413

Scope of delivery o o o o o DMX 6Fire USB Power supply USB cable 1.8m 1 Adaptor (6.3mm 3.5mm mono) 1 Adaptor (6.3mm 3.5mm stereo)

Setting up the system


This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software and the DMX 6Fire USB driver first. Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the hardware requirements stated above; the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful.

Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP


Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. However, power can be switched on in the sound card. 1. Before you start, ensure that your Windows XP version is up to date. Right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties from the context menu. The System Properties dialog appears, in which you can check your current service pack version. You can also enter the System Properties dialog by going to Start | Settings | Control Panel | System. It is important for Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2 for short) or Windows Vista to be installed on your computer. If this is not the case, please contact Microsoft (www.microsoft.com) to update your system. For Windows, this is generally free of charge. 2. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card driver. Please note that this specific version of the driver needs to be used. 3. Double-click on the installation file. The installation wizard will now display its welcome message.

414

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4. The default destination for the installation is specified in the following window. If you prefer another folder, select Browse... and choose the corresponding directory. Then, click Install.

5. You can disregard the safety warning without concern. Click Continue Anyway to continue. 6. The driver is now installed in the system, and as soon as the message below appears, you can connect the DMX 6Fire USB to your computer's USB 2.0 port using the cable provided. If Nemo Multi hardware is used, sound card can be connected also to the Multi unit. Windows XP will automatically recognize the device as new hardware and open the driver installation dialogue.

APPE NDI X 6

415

7. The Windows Found New Hardware Wizard asks what driver to use for the new hardware component. You do not have to search for the driver online. The next window asks about the driver for the DMX 6Fire USB hardware. Next, select Install the software automatically [Recommended] and confirm with Next. 8. Then, just to be safe, a new system restore point is set. Nothing to be concerned aboutthis is a standard precaution.

9. This concludes part 1 of the installation, so click Finish. 10. This returns you to the installation wizard, as only the drivers for the USB controller have been installed; now, the drivers that make the controller a USB audio device are installed. Here, too, select Install the software automatically to install the second batch of drivers. 11. Again, you can safely ignore the message that the software did not pass the Windows Logo test. 12. Click Finish to complete the installation of the drivers.

416

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

13. Once the drivers have been installed, the DMX 6Fire USB should appear in the device manager with the following entries. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button.

14. After installation remember to check that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls are adjusted to the minimum and the PAD switches are in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. 15. Note that the volume level of the test terminals needs to be adjusted according to the table below during a voice call: Terminal Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95 US, N96, N96 US, N97, N97US Nokia 6720(US), C5, C5-03, C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206, C676 LG VX8350, VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10

10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7

16. Start TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Control Panel from Start | TerraTec | DMX6FireUSB.

APPE NDI X 6

417

17. From the control panel set the settings as in the screen shots below. Remember to also pay attention to the bottom part of the panel. 18. Input settings: Set Input and Input levels to +5dB Set the Waveplay and Waveplay levels to -5dB (with Datang and Leadcore: -13dB, and with Samsung SGH-U800: -5db -> -10db) Unset all routing buttons at the bottom of the panel except set Waveplay 1/2 routing to 1/2 and Waveplay 3/4 routing to Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E terminals the TerraTec control panel settings are different from other terminals. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals, unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/WCDMA terminals.

19. Output settings: Set all Output levels and Master to 0dB

418

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

20. From Miscellaneous | Asio | Asio Latency, select Maximum (8.0ms 384 samples) and close the Asio Latency window. Now you can start Nemo Outdoor. You can leave the DMX control panel open or close it. Note that if there is a system that measures acceleration in the laptop and which causes the hard disk to stop when jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise there may be breaks in the measurement files. 21. With the Lenovo T61 laptop you can turn this system off by going to Start | ThinkVantage Productivity Center and selecting Security | Protection and Recovery | Protect my hard-drive [ ] Enable Active Protection System. 22. Next, in Nemo Outdoor add a terminal by going to Measurement | Add New Device | Phone In the Phone Properties dialog select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the bigger number as the modem port and the port with the smaller number as the trace port, e.g., COM100 as trace port and COM101 as modem port. Next, select the Sound card channel item. You will see a list of numbered options from channel 1 onwards. Select the channel based on to which LINE IN and LINE out jack you connected the audio cable in the sound card. You do not need to select anything in the dial-up connection fields unless you are also performing data transfers. In this case please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information.

APPE NDI X 6

419

23. Select Measurement Properties | Voice number | Properties. Refer to page 103 for more information on voice quality settings. 24. Click OK in the Measurement Properties dialog. You are now ready to perform voice quality measurements. Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles, make sure that you select the correct channel for each mobile. Note that if you are using more than two mobiles for voice quality measurements, Nemo Outdoor Multi is needed. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual in Appendix 5 for information on the Nemo Outdoor Multi system. Note that when you are using a separate 300W inverter, it is recommended that the computer and sound card be connected to the inverter prior to starting measurements. For example, if the computer is connected to the inverter during a measurement, it is possible that it causes a temporary supply voltage disconnection. This further risks an interruption in the reception of MOS values.

420

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card
Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one USB sound card can be connected to the computer at a time Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements, it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. First of all, an Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously, try the following. First, if you have many applications running on the laptop, try closing the unnecessary ones. Next, disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results.

TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card


Product Code 100256-01 Product Name Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 sound card NOTE! Use this code only when voice quality system is sold with Nemo Outdoor Multi (100149-00 or 10024300) or without multi hardware. With Nemo Multi Lite use code 100318-00 Configuration 1) 1 x Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 sound card with required accessories including: -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 sound card -USB A to B data cable -220V power supply -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB driver (427001-00) -Inverter Mascot 2285 12V/ 220V 300W for sound card and computer. ELFA 69-715-27 (499048-02) -Inverter Mascot 9984 12V/ 220V 150W for sound card. ELFA 69-717-09 (499048-05) -PWR Cable for Inverter (4m) (499048-03) -Extension cord for sound card ELFA 42-223-76 (419009-00) -Flat head screw driver 3,5mm ELFA 80-361-47 (499048-04) -Terratec Cover 1180-p-030 (42700101) -Terratec Strain Relief 1180-p031(427001-02) -Line Mic4 adapter (427000-01)

APPE NDI X 6

421

Note that when used in a vehicle, the sound card should only be used with the two power inverters provided by Anite Finland. The Mascot 2285 inverter is meant to be used with the sound card and the laptop. The Mascot 9984 inverter is only meant to be used with the sound card. It is not recommended that other devices be connected to it to ensure sufficient power supply. In case of overload the user risks receiving erroneous measurement results. Note that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls need to be adjusted to the minimum, and the PAD switches need to be in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel.

At the back of the TerraTec Sound Card:

The power cable is connected to the POWER connector and the other end of the power cable is connected to the inverter. The A to B USB cable is connected to the USB connector, and the other end of the cable is connected directly to the laptop.

Note that the A to B USB cable should be connected directly to the laptop! Do not connect the cable to the multi hardware (if used). The red RCA lead is connected to LINE IN 1 and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT 1. When there are more than one test terminal in use, the terminals always take up the same number in both LINE IN and LINE OUT.

Nokia N85(US)/N95(US)/N96(US)/6720(US), N97(US)


Product Code 100257-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95, N95US, N96 and N96US Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600)

422

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

2) Audio cable CA-75U included in the terminal sales package. 100257-03 Voice Quality with Nokia N85, N85US, N97, N97US, 6720 and 6720US. Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male- female) (42004600) 2) 1 x audio cable CA-75U (420047-00)

The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter (1) and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. The red RCA lead will be connected to LINE IN X and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT X connector. Note that the red audio cable (CA-75U) connector will remain unused.

APPE NDI X 6

423

You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card, as shown below. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable Line In connector in the sound card, and the yellow audio connector to the line mic adapter. The red audio cable connector will remain unused.

Note that the volume on the Nokia N85/N95/N96/6720/N97 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call.

Nokia 3500 and 612X


Product Code 100258-01 Product Name N612x/3500 audio cables/ adapter package.Nokia 6120, 6121 and Nokia 3500. Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) 2) 1 x 2.5mm 4- pin- RCA male audio cable (420042-00) 3) RCA male audio cable (420042-00)

The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound cards LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.

424

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card, as shown below. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card, and the yellow audio connector to the Line mic adapter.

Note that the volume on the Nokia 612X and 3500 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call.

APPE NDI X 6

425

LG CDMA/VX8350/VX8360/Huawei C7600 (EVDO)


Product Code 100259-01 Product Name CDMA audio cable/adapter package for LG C680, LG C676, LG KX206, LG KX256, LG VX8350/VX8360 and Huawei C7600. Configuration

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) Note that the volume on LG C680 needs to be adjusted to level 3 (3/8) during a voice call. Note that the volume on LG C676 and KX206 needs to be adjusted to level 4 (4/7) during a voice call. Note that the volume on the Huawei C7600 terminal needs to be adjusted to maximum level (7/7) during a voice call. Note that the volume on the LG VX8350 and VX8360 terminals needs to be adjusted to the maximum (8/8) during a voice call. The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card, and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter (colors visible on the inside of the connectors).

426

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore LC 8130E


Product Code 100260-01 Product Name Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore 8130E audio cable/adapter package. Configuration

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN/ANALOG IN connector in the sound card, and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter which is connected to the sound card LINE OUT/ANALOG OUT connector(s) (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). Below you see examples for both the TerraTec and Maya sound cards.

APPE NDI X 6

427

You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the sound card.

428

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals the Terratec control panel settings are different from other terminals. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals, unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/ WCDMA terminals.

APPE NDI X 6

429

Samsung SGH-U800
Product Code 100259-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Samsung audio cable/adapter package for the following Samsung models: SGH-U800 Configuration

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00) 3) Samsung S20-Pin Multi-Adapter 2.5mm AAET554CBEBSTD (419004-01) Note that the volume on the Samsung SGH-U800 terminal needs to be adjusted to 3 / 7 during a voice call. The white (see inside the connector) audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the red audio connector to the red RCA lead. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound cards LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.

430

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card, as shown below. In this case the red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card, and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter.

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI
Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card and with Nemo Outdoor Multi.

Note that with Nokia C5, C5-03, C7-00, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720 and 6720US terminals, after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.

APPE NDI X 6

431

Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used, place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements, it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. First of all, an Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously, try the following. First, if you have many applications running on the laptop, try closing the unnecessary ones. Next, disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD


Technical Specifications
4 input channels and 4 output channels with RCA connectors -10dBV input / output level (unbalanced) optical S/PDIF digital output with Miniplug connector headphone output (1/8" connector) with 60mW amplifier ASIO 2.0 and CoreAudio support (4 inputs / 4 outputs) MME / WDM support (2 inputs / 2 outputs) standard USB connection to PC compatible with Windows 2000, XP and Vista compatible with all major DJ software applications compatible with all major professional audio applications compact, portable and lightweight design

Note that for voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the following hardware requirements: the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful. Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one Maya44 USB sound card can be connected to a computer at a time. However, sound cards from other manufacturers can be connected simultaneously to the same laptop with Maya44.

432

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Maya44 sound card components

APPE NDI X 6

433

Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver


Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. However, power can be switched on in the sound card. 1. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\Maya44 USB driver. 2. Double-click on Setup.exe to start the installation. 3. Choose the language of your preference, and click OK. 4. Click on Install the driver. 5. Select I accept the agreement in the License Agreement dialog, and click on Install.

6. A dialog appears suggesting you connect the Maya sound card to a USB slot in your PC.

7. The installation wizard may prompt you to remove and reconnect the sound card. In such a case, do as instructed. 8. Windows should automatically detect the Maya44 sound card. 9. Click Exit in the Installation finished dialog.

434

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

10. The driver installation is now finished. 11. Once the drivers have been installed, go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button. The AudioDevice on USB Bus 2.8.7 and Maya 44 2.8.7 items should appear under Sound, video and game controllers, and Universal Serial Bus controllers, respectively.

APPE NDI X 6

435

12. Next, connect your test terminals to Maya sound card. From the picture below you will see the right configuration. The line mic adapter goes to Analog Out, and the White cable to Analog in. The numbering in Analog Out and Analog in should be the same for each terminal. For example, terminal 1 will take up Analog Out 1 and Analog In 1 connectors.

13. Next, go to the installation folder and click on Maya44Panel.exe. 14. If the device is not connected, the following dialog appears.

15. If the device is connected, the following control panel dialog appears. Configure the settings as in the image below.

16. And below the Input and Output settings clarified.

436

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

17. Hence, set the Input settings slide control to between 7 and 8, and the Output slide control all the way up as in the image. 18. Set the Monitor In 1+2 and 3+4 to mute.

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI
Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the Maya44 and TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound cards, and with Nemo Outdoor Multi or Nemo Multi Lite. Up to 6 test terminals can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi with this configuration.

Note that with Nokia C5, C5-03, C7-00, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.

APPE NDI X 6

437

Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used, place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. Note that a Quad-core computer must be used with voice quality measurements if the number of VQ terminals is more than four. When using Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards, four VQ terminals are connected to TerraTec and two VQ terminals to the Maya44 sound card. The TerraTec sound card is located at the bottom of the Multi Lite casing. The Maya44 sound card can be placed on the middle panel as shown in the image above. During transportation it can be placed in the pouch at the bottom of the case lid.

438

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS


After software installations and hardware setup you are ready to start the measurements. You will receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use your own samples, please read the requirements below. Test sample requirements: 8kHz sampling rate 16-bit linear PCM signal scaled to 90% of full scale band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz minimum duration of each sample: 2 seconds maximum duration of each sample: o o EVOQ module: 6 seconds TerraTec sound card: 10 seconds

Server-side limitations that do not affect mobile-to-mobile testing are: maximum of nine samples total in server test-sample folder the first 1.5 seconds have to be different in each sample

Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements

Making mobile-to-mobile voice quality measurements:


1. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32).

Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may impair sample flow from the terminal. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4 or to the second highest level with N95. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Switch off the alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below:

APPE NDI X 6

439

Terminal Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95 US, N96, N96 US, N97, N97US Nokia 6720(US), C5, C5-03, C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206, C676 LG VX8350, VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800

Volume level 8 / 10

10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7

2. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling from. 3. Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). Click on the Script Editor button to create a new script.

4. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.

440

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

5. In the Voice Call Properties dialog: Define the phone number of the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling. Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. Select the Voice quality option. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Click OK.

APPE NDI X 6

441

6. In the Script Editor dialog, double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether end command type is normal or forced. Define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter.

7. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close. 8. Define the voice quality settings for the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling to. 9. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement | <device> | Measurement Properties).

442

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

10. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, click the Properties button next to the Voice Number field.

APPE NDI X 6

443

11. In the Voice Call Properties dialog: Define the phone number of the first mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are receiving calls from. Select the Voice quality option Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. Define a Prefix for the received files. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the file name of all received files. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Select the same file as for the other mobile. Click OK.

12. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. Select Data | Line Graph | New.

13. An empty line graph window opens. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Select the audio parameters, and drag them in the graph window. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.

444

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

14. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.

Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements
Please complete the Nemo server installation before continuing. See Appendix 1 for detailed instructions.

Making mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements:


1. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32).

Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may impair sample flow from the terminal. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Switch off the alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score.

APPE NDI X 6

445

Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below: Terminal Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95 US, N96, N96 US, N97, N97US Nokia 6720(US), C5, C5-03, C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206, C676 LG VX8350, VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Volume level 8 / 10

10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7

2. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Properties dialog: Select one of the default test samples. Make sure that the server has the same samples in its reference sample folder (see Nemo Server installation guide for details). Set the time between calls parameter to one minute.

3. If you are using scripts, click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. 4. If you are performing measurements manually, select Start Voice Call from the Measurement menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. With each voice call, the voice quality measurement is run. 5. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile.

446

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). Click the Script Editor button to create a new script.

6. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.

7. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:

APPE NDI X 6

447

Define the phone number of the fixed end, i.e., the server that is answering the calls and sending back the samples. Select the Voice Quality option. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Please make sure that the same reference file exists also on the server. Click OK.

8. In the Script Editor dialog, define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter.

448

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

9. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close. 10. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. Select Data | Line Graph | New.

11. An empty line graph window opens. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Select the audio parameters, and drag them in the graph window. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.

APPE NDI X 6

449

12. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.

450

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES


PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA
UAC Settings
If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify, it might cause issues with data testing. A PS connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. It is recommended that the UAC settings are changed to Never notify. This can be done via User Account Control Settings. If UAC settings cannot be changed, it is highly recommended that Nemo Outdoor is started with administration rights by right-clicking the Nemo Outdoor icon and by selecting Run as administrator.

Antivirus Filtering
Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. If the data transfer still does not work properly, please do the following: 1. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context). 2. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device. 3. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked.

Low Data Throughputs


In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications, read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity, server or transmission problems.

APPE NDI X 9

451

In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. Other things that could help troubleshooting: Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. Try another FTP server for comparison. Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also try different servers. For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed. For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually. Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the device. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor, only the trace port should be defined. The modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank. As ports are left blank it is not possible to perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor. However, a script file with data connection commands can be used. Script files should include only data transfer commands, not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. Start a data transfer and observe the application data throughput value. Make the same test again but this time make a connection using Nemo Outdoor.

All Windows Versions


How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark:
1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

452

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Using Nemo Outdoor:


1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3.

Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):


1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. A measurement file (.nmf) does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed.

Windows XP
Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. If the registry value is missing, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB.

Windows Vista/Windows7
Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This registry entry can be removed.

APPE NDI X 9

453

If the TCP auto-tuning is disabled Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. Outdoor 5.40 and newer checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:


1. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.

2.

Type netsh interface tcp show global

3.

Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. 4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click and select Run as administrator.

5.

To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. However, Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled.

6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted. 7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

454

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535). highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value, very conservatively. restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

8. Windows XP fix KB943198 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/943198) is needed when using HSDPA category 6 or higher data transfer speeds with Nokia test terminals.

APPE NDI X 10

455

APPENDIX 10
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite Finland Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software Product" or "Software"). The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media, any printed materials, and any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or otherwise using the Software Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA, Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. In such event, you may not use or copy the Software Product, and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase. SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights: Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware"). You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product. Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other computers over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. 2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation, or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats. Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite Finland Ltd's prior written consent. Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as designated above.

456

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Not for Resale. This Software Product is Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as specified below. Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity. Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time. Without prejudice to any other rights, Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies of the Software Product and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland Ltd in writing that such has been done. 3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part of the Support Services, Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose, including for product updates and development. 4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets", incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the Software Product, are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the Anite Finland Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product. Portions based on WinWAP technology. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004. http://www.winwap.com Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US, and other patents and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl. -Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2004, http://www.opticom.de. For further information, please refer to http://www.pesq.org. This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed license information, see libresample-license.txt, gpl-license.txt and lgpl-license.txt located in the Nemo Outdoor installation directory. Iperf copyright Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved.

APPE NDI X 10

457

Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium. Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install the other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product. 6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person under the same or similar circumstances.

458

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable. 8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable, they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively. 9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at Anite Finland Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid, or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident, abuse, misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including, but not limited to Acts of God, acts of nature or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Anite Finland Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records. 10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Finland Ltd disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of third-party rights, with regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. 11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software Product, even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any case, Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other conduct. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.

You might also like